Samsung Scx 6555Nx Users Manual ManualsLib Makes It Easy To Find Manuals Online!

2014-12-11

: Samsung Samsung-Scx-6555Nx-Users-Manual-121245 samsung-scx-6555nx-users-manual-121245 samsung pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 176 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

SCX-6555NX Series

Multi Functional Printer

User’s Guide

imagine the possibilities

Thank you for purchasing a Samsung product.

features of your new laser MFP

Thank you for purchasing this Samsung multifunctional product. Your machine provides printing, copying, scanning, and faxing

functions.

With the machine, you can:

SPECIAL FEATURES

Print with excellent quality and speed

• You can print with a resolution of up to 1200 dpi Effective

output. See Software section.

• Your machine prints A4-sized paper at up to 53 ppm and

letter-sized paper at up to 55 ppm.

• For duplex printing, your machine prints A4-sized paper at

up to 50 ipm and letter-sized paper at up to 52 ipm.

Handle many different types of printable material

• The multi-purpose tray supports letterhead, envelopes,

labels, transparencies, custom-sized media, postcards, and

heavy paper. The multi-purpose tray holds up to 100 sheets

of plain paper.

• The 520 sheet tray 1 and 520 sheet optional tray support

plain paper in various sizes.

• The 2,100 sheet optional high tray support plain paper in

various sizes.

Create professional documents

• Print Watermarks. You can customize your documents with

words, such as “Confidential”. See Software section.

• Print Posters. The text and pictures of each page of your

document are magnified and printed across the sheet of

paper and can then be taped together to form a poster. See

Software section.

• You can use preprinted forms and letterhead with plain

paper. See Software section.

Save time and money

• To save paper, you can print multiple pages on one single

sheet of paper.

• This machine automatically conserves electricity by

substantially reducing power consumption when not in use.

• To save paper, you can print on both sides of the paper

(double-sided printing). See Software section.

Expand your machine’s capacity

• Your machine has an extra memory slot to expand their

memory. (See "Installing a memory DIMM" on page 112.)

• A Network interface enables network printing. Your

machine comes with a built-in network interface, 10/100/

1000 Base TX.

• Zoran IPS Emulation* compatible with PostScript

Some features are optional. Please check the

specifications sections. (See "Specifications" on

page 115.)

Emulation* (PS) enables PS printing.

Print in various environments

• You can print with various operating system such as

Windows, Linux and Macintosh systems.

• Your machine is equipped with a USB interface and a

network interface.

Copy originals in several formats

• You can create a booklet using sequential 2-sided

document production.

• There are special functions to erase punch holes, staple

marks and newspaper background.

• The print quality and image size may be adjusted and

enhanced at the same time.

Scan the originals and send it right away

• Quickly scan and send files to multiple destinations using,

E-mail, SMB, FTP or Networks scanning.

• Simply use the touch screen keyboard to enter email

addresses and send the scanned image immediately.

• Scan in color and use the precise compressions of JPEG,

TIFF and PDF formats.

Set a specific time to transmit a Fax (Optional)

• You can specify a certain time to transmit the fax and also

send the fax to several stored destinations.

• After the transmission, the machine may print out the fax

reports according to the setting.

Use USB memory devices

If you have a USB memory device, you can use it in various

ways with your machine. (See "Using USB memory device" on

page 70.)

IPv6

This machine supports IPv6.

Support XOA applications

The machine supports XOA custom applications.

• Regarding the XOA custom applications, please contact

your XOA custom application provider.

* Zoran IPS Emulation compatible with PostScript 3

Zoran, the Zoran logo, IPS/PS3, and OneImage are

trademarks of Zoran Corporation.

* 136PS3 fonts

Contains UFST and MicroType from Monotype Imaging Inc.

FEATURES BY MODELS

The machine is designed to support all of your document needs – from printing and copying, to more advanced networking solutions for your business.

Basic features of this machine include;

( : Included, O: Optional, Blank: Not Available)

ABOUT THIS USER’S GUIDE

This user’s guide provides information about basic understanding of the machine as well as detailed explanation on each step during the actual usage. Both novice

users and professional users can refer to this guide for installing and using the machine.

Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably, as below:

• Document is synonymous with original.

• Paper is synonymous with media, or print media.

The following table offers the conventions of this guide.

FEATURES SCX-6555NX

USB 2.0

USB Memory

DADF (Duplex Automatic Document Feeder)

Hard Disk

Network Interface Enthernet 10/100/1000 Base TX wired LAN

Duplex (2-sided) printing

FAX O

CONVENTION DESCRIPTION EXAMPLE

Bold Used for texts on the display or actual prints on the machine. Start

Note Used to provide additional information or detailed specification of the machine

function and feature.

.The date format may differ from

country to country

Caution Used to give users information to protect the machine from possible mechanical

damage or malfunction.

Do not touch the green underside of

the print cartridge.

>Used to show the steps of selecting or pressing items in order.

The example means; press Copy from the Main screen, press the Advanced tab,

and then press Clone Copy.

Copy > the Advanced tab > Clone Copy

Footnote Used to provide more detailed information on certain words or a phrase. a. pages per minute

(See page 1 for more

information)

Used to guide users to the reference page for the additional detailed information. (See page1 for more information)

FINDING MORE INFORMATION

You can find information for setting up and using your machine from the following resources, either as a print-out or onscreen.

Quick Install Guide Provides information on setting up your machine and this requires that you follow the instructions in the guide to prepare the machine.

Online User’s Guide Provides you with step-by-step instructions for using your machine’s full features, and contains information for maintaining your

machine, troubleshooting, and installing accessories.

This user’s guide also contains Software section to provide you with information on how to print documents with your machine in

various operating systems, and how to use the included software utilities.

Printer Driver Help Provides you with help information on printer driver properties and instructions for setting up the properties for printing. To access a

printer driver help screen, click

Help

from the printer properties dialog box.

Samsung website If you have Internet access, you can get help, support, printer drivers, manuals, and order information from the Samsung website,

www.samsungprinter.com.

safety information

IMPORTANT SAFETY SYMBOLS AND PRECAUTIONS

What the icons and signs in this user manual mean:

These warning signs are here to prevent injury to you and others.

Please follow them explicitly.

After reading this section, keep it in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING

Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe personal injury or death.

CAUTION

Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor personal injury or property damage.

CAUTION

To reduce the risk of fire, explosion, electric shock, or personal injury when using your laser MFP, follow these basic safety

precautions:

Do NOT attempt.

Do NOT disassemble.YTU

Do NOT touch.

Follow directions explicitly.

Unplug the power plug from the wall socket.

Make sure the MFP is grounded to prevent electric shock.

Call the service center for help.

1. Read and understand all instructions.

2. Use common sense whenever operating electrical appliances.

3. Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the machine and in the literature accompanying the machine.

4. If an operating instruction appears to conflict with safety information, heed the safety information. You may have misunderstood the

operating instruction. If you cannot resolve the conflict, contact your sales or service representative for assistance.

5. Unplug the machine from the AC wall socket and/or telephone jack before cleaning. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners. Use only

a damp cloth for cleaning.

6. Do not place the machine on an unstable cart, stand or table. It may fall, causing serious damage.

7. Your machine should never be placed on, near or over a radiator, heater, air conditioner or ventilation duct.

8. Do not allow anything to rest on the power. Do not locate your machine where the cords will be abused by persons walking on them.

9. Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords. This can diminish performance, and may result in the risk of fire or electric shock.

10. Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power, telephone or PC interface cords.

11. Never push objects of any kind into the machine through case or cabinet openings. They may touch dangerous voltage points,

creating a risk of fire or shock. Never spill liquid of any kind onto or into the machine.

12. To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not disassemble the machine. Take it to a qualified service technician when repair work is

required. Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or other risks. Incorrect reassembly could cause

electric shock when the unit is subsequently used.

LASER SAFETY STATEMENT

The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I(1) laser products, and

elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 825.

Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to

laser radiation above a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance or prescribed service condition.

WARNING

Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from Laser/Scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible,

can damage your eyes.

When using this product, these basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons:

13. Unplug the machine from the telephone jack, PC and AC wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the

following conditions:

• When any part of the power cord, plug or connecting cable is damaged or frayed.

• If liquid has been spilled into the machine.

• If the machine has been exposed to rain or water.

• If the machine does not operate properly after instructions have been followed.

• If the machine has been dropped, or the cabinet appears damaged.

• If the machine exhibits a sudden and distinct change in performance.

14. Adjust only those controls covered by the operating instructions. Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage, and

may require extensive work by a qualified service technician to restore the machine to normal operation.

15. Avoid using this machine during a lightning storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. If possible, unplug the

AC power and telephone cord for the duration of the lightning storm.

16. The Power cord supplied with your machine should be used for safe operation. If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 m with

110 V machine, then it should be 16 AWGa or bigger.

17. Use only No.26 AWG* or larger telephone line cord.

18. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

19. This machine can be operated only in the country you have purchased. (Due to different voltage, frequency, telecommunication

configuration and etc.)

a. AWG: American Wire Gauge

OZONE SAFETY

During normal operation, this machine produces ozone. The ozone produced does not present a hazard to the operator. However, it is

advisable that the machine be operated in a well ventilated area.

If you need additional information about ozone, request your nearest Samsung dealer.

MERCURY SAFETY

Contains Mercury, Dispose According to Local, State or Federal Laws.(U.S.A. only)

PERCHLORATE WARNING

This Perchlorate warning applies only to primary CR (Manganese Dioxide) Lithium coin cells in the product sold or distributed ONLY in California

USA.

Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply.

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. (U.S.A. only)

POWER SAVER

This printer contains advanced energy conservation technology that reduces power consumption when it is not in active use.

When the printer does not receive data for an extended period of time, power consumption is automatically lowered.

ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks.

For more information on the ENERGY STAR program see http://www.energystar.gov

RECYCLING

Please recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product in an environmentally responsible manner.

CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT (WASTE ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT)

(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems)

This marking shown on the product or its literature, indicates that it should not be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its

working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate this from other

types of wastes and recycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources.

Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and

how they can take this item for environmentally safe recycling.

Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product should not be mixed

with other commercial wastes for disposal.

CORRECT DISPOSAL OF BATTERIES IN THIS PRODUCT

(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate battery return systems.)

This marking on the battery, manual or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed with other household

waste at the end of their working life. Where marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury, cadmium

or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006/66. If batteries are not properly disposed of, these substances can cause harm to

human health or the environment.

To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse, please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through

your local, free battery return system.

RADIO FREQUENCY EMISSIONS

FCC Information to the User

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference, and

• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These

limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses

and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to

radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause

harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to

try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

• Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help.

Canadian Radio Interference Regulations

This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing

equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus”, ICES-003 of the Industry and Science Canada.

Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe A prescrites dans la

norme sur le matériel brouilleur: “Appareils Numériques”, ICES-003 édictée par l’Industrie et Sciences Canada.

FAX BRANDING

The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any

message via a telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or

on the first page of the transmission the following information:

(1) the date and time of transmission

(2) identification of either business, business entity or individual sending the message; and

(3) telephone number of either the sending machine, business, business entity or individual.

The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities, equipment operations or procedures where such action is

reasonably required in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules and regulations in FCC Part 68. If such changes can

be reasonably expected to render any customer terminal equipment incompatible with telephone company communications facilities, or

require modification or alteration of such terminal equipment, or otherwise materially affect its use or performance, the customer shall be given

adequate notice in writing, to allow the customer an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service

RINGER EQUIVALENCE NUMBER

The Ringer Equivalence Number and FCC Registration Number for this machine may be found on the label located on the bottom or rear of

the machine. In some instances you may need to provide these numbers to the telephone company.

The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is a measure of the electrical load placed on the telephone line, and is useful for determining whether

you have “overloaded” the line. Installing several types of equipment on the same telephone line may result in problems making and receiving

telephone calls, especially ringing when your line is called. The sum of all Ringer Equivalence Numbers of the equipment on your telephone

line should be less than five in order to assure proper service from the telephone company. In some cases, a sum of five may not be usable on

your line. If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly, you should immediately remove it from your telephone line, as it may

cause harm to the telephone network.

The equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the rear of this equipment is a label

that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to

the telephone company.

Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to oper-

ate the equipment.

You should also know that:

• Your machine is not designed to be connected to a digital PBX system.

• If you intend to use a computer modem or fax modem on the same phone line as your machine, you may experience transmission and

reception problems with all the equipment. It is recommended that no other equipment, except for a regular telephone, share the line with

your machine.

• If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power surges, we recommend that you install surge protectors for both the power

and the telephone lines. Surge protectors can be purchased from your dealer or telephone and electronic specialty stores.

• When programming emergency numbers and/or making test calls to emergency numbers, use a non-emergency number to advise the

emergency service dispatcher of your intentions. The dispatcher will give you further instructions on how to actually test the emergency

number.

• This machine may not be used on coin service or party lines.

• This machine provides magnetic coupling to hearing aids.

You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone network by means of a standard modular jack, USOC RJ-11C.

REPLACING THE FITTED PLUG (FOR UK ONLY)

Important

The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard (BS 1363) 13 amp plug and has a 13 amp fuse. When you change or examine the

fuse, you must re-fit the correct 13 amp fuse. You then need to replace the fuse cover. If you have lost the fuse cover, do not use the plug until

you have another fuse cover.

Please contact the people from you purchased the machine.

The 13 amp plug is the most widely used type in the UK and should be suitable. However, some buildings (mainly old ones) do not have

normal 13 amp plug sockets. You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor. Do not remove the moulded plug.

Important warning:

You must earth this machine.

The wires in the mains lead have the following color code:

• Green and Yellow: Earth

• Blue: Neutral

•Brown: Live

If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug, do the following:

You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter “E” or by the safety ‘Earth symbol’ or colored green and yellow or

green.

You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “N” or colored black.

You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “L” or colored red.

You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug, adaptor, or at the distribution board.

FCC Regulations state that changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the

user’s authority to operate this equipment. In the event that terminal equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone

company should notify the customer that service may be stopped. However, where prior notice is impractical, the company may

temporarily cease service, providing that they:

a) promptly notify the customer.

b) give the customer an opportunity to correct the equipment problem.

c) inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal Communication Commission pursuant to procedures set out in

FCC Rules and Regulations Subpart E of Part 68.

If you cut off the moulded plug, get rid of it straight away.

You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you plug it into a socket.

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY (EUROPEAN COUNTRIES)

Approvals and Certifications

The CE marking applied to this product symbolizes Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Declaration of Conformity with the following applicable 93/

68/EEC Directives of the European Union as of the dates indicated:

The declaration of conformity may be consulted at www.samsung.com/printer, go to Support > Download center and enter your printer name

to browse the EuDoC.

January 1, 1995: Council Directive 2006/95/EC Approximation of the laws of the member states related to low voltage equipment.

January 1, 1996: Council Directive 2004/108/EC (92/31/EEC), approximation of the laws of the Member States related to electromagnetic

compatibility.

March 9, 1999: Council Directive 1999/5/EC on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of

their conformity. A full declaration, defining the relevant Directives and referenced standards can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics

Co., Ltd. representative.

EC Certification

Certification to 1999/5/EC Radio Equipment & Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive (FAX)

This Samsung product has been self-certified by Samsung for pan-European single terminal connection to the analogue public switched

telephone network (PSTN) in accordance with Directive 1999/5/EC. The product has been designed to work with the national PSTNs and

compatible PBXs of the European countries:

In the event of problems, you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. in the first instance.

The product has been tested against TBR21. To assist in the use and application of terminal equipment which complies with this standard, the

European Telecommunication Standards Institute (ETSI) has issued an advisory document (EG 201 121) which contains notes and additional

requirements to ensure network compatibility of TBR21 terminals. The product has been designed against, and is fully compliant with, all of the

relevant advisory notes contained in this document.

OPENSSL LICENSE

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the

documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: "This product includes

software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"

4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software

without

5. prior written permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.

6. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written

permission of the OpenSSL Project.

7. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the

OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT

NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN

NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,

EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR

SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,

WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE

USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young(eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim

Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).

ORIGINAL SSLEAY LICENSE

This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with

Netscapes SSL.

This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply

to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with

this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Copyright remains Eric

Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be

given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in

documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the

documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes

cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)" The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library

being used are not cryptographic related:-).

4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an

acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED

TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT

SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,

DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,

STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,

EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply

be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]

contents

2 Features of your new laser MFP

5 Safety Information

INTRODUCTION

18 Printer overview

18 Front view

18 Rear view

19 Control panel overview

20 Introducing the touch screen and useful buttons

20 Touch screen

20 Machine Setup button

20 Job Status button

21 XOA button

21 Power Saver Button

21 Interrupt button

21 Managing your machine from the website

21 To access SyncThru™ Web Service:

22 Understanding the Status LED

23 Menu overview

23 Main screen

23 Machine Setup button

24 Job Status button

25 Supplied software

25 Printer driver features

25 Printer driver

GETTING STARTED

26 Setting up the hardware

26 Setting up the network

26 Supported operating systems

27 Configuring network protocol via the machine

27 System requirements

27 Windows

28 Macintosh

28 Linux

28 Installing the software

29 Machine's basic settings

29 Altitude adjustment

30 Setting the authentication password

30 Setting the date and time

30 Changing the display language

30 Setting job timeout

30 Using energy saving feature

30 Setting the default tray and paper

31 Changing the default settings

31 Using the SetIP program

32 Understanding the keyboard

LOADING ORIGINALS AND PRINT MEDIA

33 Loading originals

33 On the scanner glass

33 In the DADF

34 Selecting print media

35 Specification on print media

36 Media sizes supported in each mode

36 Guidelines for special print media

37 Changing the size of the paper in the paper tray

38 Loading paper

contents

38 Loading paper in tray 1, optional tray or optional high capacity feeder

39 In the multi-purpose tray

40 Setting the paper size and type

COPYING

41 Understanding the Copy screen

41 Basic tab

41 Advanced tab

42 Image tab

42 Copying originals

42 Changing the settings for each copy

42 Changing the size of originals

43 Reducing or enlarging copies

43 Copying on both sides of originals (Duplex)

44 Deciding the form of copy output (Collated / Staple)

44 Selecting the type of originals

44 Changing the darkness

44 Using special copy features

44 ID card copying

45 Copying ID with the manual ID copy option

45 2-up or 4-up copying (N-up)

45 Poster copying

46 Clone copying

46 Book copying

46 Booklet copying

47 Cover copying

47 Transparency copying

47 Erasing edges

47 Erasing background images

47 Shifting margins

48 Watermark copying

48 Overlay copying

48 Auto crop copying

48 Multi-Bin

SCANNING

49 Scanning basics

49 Understanding the Scan screen

50 Basic tab

50 Advanced tab

50 Image tab

51 Output tab

51 Scanning originals and sending through email (Scan to Email)

51 Sending a scanned image to several destinations as an email attachment

51 Storing email addresses

52 Entering email addresses by the address book

52 Entering email addresses by the keyboard

53 Using Scan and Fax Manager 2

53 Set Scan Button tab

53 Scan Assistant

54 Scanning by a network connection

54 Preparing for network scanning

56 Scanning originals and sending via SMB/FTP (Scan to Server)

56 Preparation for scanning to SMB/FTP

56 Scanning and sending to SMB/FTP server

56 Changing the scan feature settings

56 Duplex

56 Resolution

57 Original Size

contents

57 Original Type

57 Color Mode

57 Darkness

57 Erase Background

58 Scan to Edge

58 Quality

58 File Format

58 Scan Preset

BASIC PRINTING

59 Printing a document

59 Canceling a print job

FAXING (OPTIONAL)

60 Preparing to fax

60 Understanding the Fax screen

60 Basic tab

61 Advanced tab

61 Image tab

61 Sending a fax

61 Setting the fax header

61 Sending a fax

62 Sending a fax manually (On Hook Dial)

62 Automatic resending

62 Redialing the last number

62 Delaying a fax transmission

63 Sending a priority fax

63 Receiving a fax

63 Changing the receive modes

63 Receiving manually in Telephone mode

63 Receiving automatically in Answering Machine/Fax mode

63 Receiving faxes manually using an extension telephone

63 Receiving in secure receiving mode

64 Receiving faxes in memory

64 Adjusting the document settings

64 Duplex

64 Resolution

64 Original Type

64 Darkness

64 Erase Background

64 Color Mode

64 Setting up a fax phonebook

65 Storing individual fax numbers (Speed Dial No.)

65 Storing Group fax numbers (Group No.)

65 Setting up a fax phonebook using SyncThru Web Service

65 Using the polling option

66 Storing the originals for polling

66 Printing (Deleting) the polling document

66 Polling a remote fax

66 Polling from a remote Mailbox

66 Using Mailbox

66 Creating Mailbox

67 Storing originals in Mailbox

67 Faxing to a remote Mailbox

68 Printing a report after sending a fax

68 Sending a fax in toll save time

contents

68 Adding documents to a reserved delay fax job

68 Forwarding a received fax to other destination

68 Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by a fax

69 Forwarding a received fax to other destination by a fax

69 Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by an email

69 Forwarding a received fax to other destination by an email

69 Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by server

69 Forwarding a received fax to other destination by server

69 Setting up the end Fax tone

MACHINE STATUS AND ADVANCED SETUP

70 Machine Setup

70 Machine Status screen

70 Admin Setting screen

71 Browsing the machine’s status

71 General settings

73 Copy Setup

73 Fax Setup

75 Network Setup

75 Authentication

76 Optional Service

76 Document Box Management

77 Printing a report

USING USB MEMORY DEVICE

78 About USB memory

78 Understanding the USB screen

78 Plugging in a USB memory device

79 Scanning to an USB memory device

79 Scanning

79 Scan to USB

79 Basic tab

79 Advanced tab

79 Image tab

79 Output tab

80 Changing the scan feature settings

80 Duplex

80 Resolution

80 Original Size

80 Original Type

80 Color Mode

81 Darkness

81 Erase Background

81 Scan to Edge

81 Quality

81 Scan Preset

81 File Format

81 File Policy

82 Printing from a USB memory device

82 To print a document from a USB memory device:

MAINTENANCE

83 Printing a machine report

83 Monitoring the supplies life

83 Finding the serial number

83 Sending the imaging unit reorder notification

83 Sending the toner reorder notification

84 Checking Document Box

contents

84 Cleaning your machine

84 Cleaning the outside

84 Cleaning the inside

84 Cleaning the transfer unit

84 Cleaning the scan unit

85 Maintaining the Toner cartridge

85 Toner cartridge storage

85 Handling instructions

85 Use of non-Samsung and refilled toner cartridge

85 Estimated cartridge life

85 Replacing the toner cartridge

86 Maintaining the imaging unit

86 Expected cartridge life

87 Replacing the imaging unit

88 Maintenance Parts

TROUBLESHOOTING

89 Tips for avoiding paper jams

89 Clearing document jams

90 Misfeed of exiting paper

90 Roller misfeed

91 Clearing paper jams

91 In the tray 1

92 In the optional tray

93 In the optional high capacity feeder

95 In the multi-purpose tray

95 In the fuser area or around the toner cartridge

95 In the paper exit area

96 In the duplex unit area

96 In the stacker (finisher)

97 Understanding display messages

100 Solving other problems

100 Touch screen problem

100 Paper feeding problems

101 Printing problems

102 Printing quality problems

104 Copying problems

105 Scanning problems

105 Fax problems

106 Common PostScript problems

107 Common Windows problems

107 Common Linux problems

109 Common Macintosh problems

ORDERING SUPPLIES AND ACCESSORIES

110

110 Supplies

110 Accessories

111 How to purchase

INSTALLING ACCESSORIES

112

112 Precautions to take when installing accessories

112 Installing a memory DIMM

112 Installing a memory module

113 Activating the added memory in the PS printer properties

113 Replacing the Stapler

114 Enabling Fax feature after installing the fax option kit

contents

SPECIFICATIONS

115

115 General specifications

115 Printer specifications

116 Copier specifications

116 Scanner specifications

116 Facsimile specifications (optional)

GLOSSARY

117

INDEX

124

introduction

These are the main components of your machine:

This chapter includes

• Printer overview

• Control panel overview

• Introducing the touch screen and useful buttons

• Managing your machine from the website

• Understanding the Status LED

• Menu overview

• Supplied software

• Printer driver features

PRINTER OVERVIEW

Front view

Rear view

1DADF document width

guides 11 Side cover

2DADF cover 12 Multi-purpose tray

3Output support 13 Front cover

4Tray 1 14 Multi-purpose tray

extension

5Optional traya

15 Multi-purpose tray paper

width guides

6Standa16 Scanner lock switch

7DADF document input tray 17 Scanner glass

8DADF document output tray 18 toner cartridge

9scanner lid 19 imaging unit

10 Control panel

a. The symbol a is a mark for the optional device.

1Extension telephone socket

(EXT)a

a. The symbol a is a mark for the optional device.

8USB memory port

2Telephone line socket

(LINE)a9Power switch

3USB port 10 Power receptacle

4dummy for FDI (Foreign

Device Interfacea)11 Finisher output tray

(Stacker & Stapler)a

5XOA port 12 finisher cover (Stacker &

Stapler)a

6network port 13 finisher (Stacker & Stapler)a

715-pin Finisher connection

(Stacker & Stapler)a

CONTROL PANEL OVERVIEW

1Machine Setup Leads you to the machine setup and advanced

settings. (See "Machine Setup" on page 75.)

2Job Status Shows the jobs currently running, queued jobs or

completed jobs.

3Status

Shows the status of your machine. (See

"Managing your machine from the website" on

page 21.)

4Display screen

Displays the current machine status and prompts

during an operation. You can set menus easily

using the touch screen.

5number keypad Dials fax number, and enters the number value

for document copies or other options.

6Clear Deletes characters in the edit area.

7Redial/Pause In standby mode, redials the last number, or in

edit mode, inserts a pause into a fax number.

8On Hook Dial Engages the telephone line.

9Interrupt Stops a job in process to do an urgent copy job.

10 Clear All Reverts the current settings to the default values.

11 Power Saver Sends the machine into the power saver mode.

(See "Using energy saving feature" on page 30.)

12 Stop

Stops an operation at any time. The pop up

window appears on the screen showing the

current job that the user can stop or resume.

13 Start Starts a job.

• All illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine

depending on its options or models.

• When you use the touch screen, use your finger only. The screen

may be damaged with a sharpen pen or else.

INTRODUCING THE TOUCH SCREEN AND

USEFUL BUTTONS

Touch screen

The touch screen allows for user-friendly operation of the machine. Once

you press the home icon ( ) on the screen, it shows the Main screen.

•: Shows Help. You can find the explanation by feature

contents.

•XOA: Enters the XOA menu. In order to use this menu, XOA

applications should be installed. For more information, contact your

local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you purchased your

machine.

•Copy: Enters the Copy menu.

•Fax: Enters the Fax menu. (Optional)

•Scan: Enters Scan to Email, Scan to PC, Scan to Server menu.

•Document Box: Enters the Document Box menu. (See "Checking

Document Box" on page 84.)

•USB: When USB memory is inserted into the USB memory port on

your machine, USB icon shows on the display screen.

•Logout: Logs out from the currently logged in account.

•Toner Info.: Shows amount of toner used.

•LCD Brightness: Adjusts the brightness of the touch screen.

• : To change the language that appears on the display.

• USB: guides you to remove the USB memory devices from the

machine. Follow the instruction on the LCD. This icon appears only

when you connect an USB memory module.

Machine Setup button

When you press this button, you can browse current machine settings or

change machine values. (See "Machine Setup" on page 75.)

•: This button allows you to move to Copy, Fax, Scan,

Document Box menu directly.

•Machine Status: Shows the current status of the machine.

•Admin Setting: Allows an administrator to set up the machine.

•Tray Management: Shows the currently installed tray and their

status. You can also change the paper settings for each tray.

•Usage Page Report: You can print the report on the amount of

printouts depending on the paper size and type.

Job Status button

When you press this button, the screen shows the lists of currently running

jobs, queued jobs and completed jobs.

•Current Job tab: Shows the list of jobs in progress and pending.

•Completed Job tab: Provides the list of completed jobs.

•Active Notice tab: Displays any error codes that have occurred.

•No.: Gives the order of jobs. The job in No. 001 is currently in

progress.

•Job Name: Shows job information like name and type.

•Status: Gives the current status of each job.

•User:Provides user name, mainly computer name.

•Job Type: Displays details of the active job, such as job type,

recipient phone number and other information.

•Delete: Removes the selected job from the list.

•Delete All: Removes all the jobs from the list.

•Detail: Shows the detailed information of the selected option on the

Active Notice list.

• Icons shown on the display screen such as Fax may be grayed

out, depending on the optional kit or program installed in your

machine.

• To switch the display screen and see other available icons, press

the right arrow on the display screen.

XOA button

When you press this button, you can use the XOA applications from the

display screen. Before using the XOA applications, they should be installed.

If the XOA button is not displayed, make sure that the machine gets XOA

license. For more information, contact your local Samsung dealer or the

retailer where you purchased your machine.

Power Saver Button

When the machine is not in use, save electricity with the provided power

save mode. Pressing this button puts the machine into power save mode.

(See "Using energy saving feature" on page 30.)

If you press this button for more than two seconds, a window appears,

requesting that you turn the power off. If you choose Yes, the power is

turned off. This button can also be used to turn the button on.

Interrupt button

When you press this button, the machine goes into interrupt mode which

means it stops a printing job for urgent copy job. When the urgent copy job

completes, the previous printing job continues.

MANAGING YOUR MACHINE FROM THE

WEBSITE

If you have connected your machine to a network and set up TCP/IP

network parameters correctly, you can manage the machine via Samsung’s

SyncThru™ Web Service, an embedded web server. Use SyncThru™

Web Service to:

• View the machine’s device information and check its current status.

• Change TCP/IP parameters and set up other network parameters.

• Change the printer properties.

• Set the machine to send email notifications to let you know the

machine’s status.

• Get support for using the machine.

To access SyncThru™ Web Service:

1. Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.

2. Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address

field and press the Enter key or click Go.

Your machine’s embedded website opens.

3. Click Login.

The log-in window appears.

4. Enter the administrator’s ID and password then click Login.

5. Change the settings as you want such as the machine settings, network

parameters, etc.

If the message asking Auth. ID and Password, if means the network

administrator has set the suthentication in Syncthru Web

Service.(See "Managing your machine from the website" on page 21.)

STATUS DESCRIPTION

Off The machine is not in the power save mode.

Blue On The machine is in the low power save mode.

Blink The machine is in the power save mode.

STATUS DESCRIPTION

Off The machine is not in interrupt printing mode.

Blue On The machine is in interrupt printing mode.

Interrupt mode is resumed at default value (Off) after the machine is

shut down or reset.

• Enter the same administrator’s ID and password to the touch

screen.

• If you do not login with administrator’s ID and password, you can

see the machine’s information only.

UNDERSTANDING THE STATUS LED

When the problem occurs, the Status LED indicates the machine's

condition by the light color of it's action.

STATUS DESCRIPTION

Off • The machine is off-line.

• The machine is in power save mode. When

data is received, or any button is pressed, it

switches to on-line automatically.

Green Blinking • When the backlight slowly blinks, the machine

is receiving data from the computer.

• When the backlight blinks rapidly, the

machine is printing data.

On The machine is on-line and can be used.

Red Blinking • A minor error has occurred and the machine is

waiting the error to be cleared. Check the

display message. When the problem is

cleared, the machine resumes.

• The toner cartridge is low. Order a new toner

cartridge. You can temporarily improve print

quality by redistributing the toner. (See

"Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 85.)

On • The imaging unit is totally out of lifespan.

Remove the old imaging unit and install a new

one. (See "Replacing the imaging unit" on

page 87.)

• The toner cartridge is totally empty. Remove

the old toner cartridge and install a new one.

(See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on

page 85.)

• A paper jam has occurred. (See "Clearing

paper jams" on page 91.)

• The cover is opened. Close the cover.

• There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in

the tray.

• The machine has stopped due to a major

error. Check the display message. (See

"Understanding display messages" on

page 97.)

Check the message on the display screen, and follow the instruction

on the message or refer to Troubleshooting part. See

"Troubleshooting" on page 89. If the problem persists, call for service.

MENU OVERVIEW

The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine or use the machine's functions. These menus can be accessed by pressing Machine

Setup, Job Status, or touching menus on the display screen. Refer to the following diagram.

Main screen

The Main screen is shown on the display screen on the control panel. Some menus are grayed out depending on your model.

Machine Setup button

When you press the Machine Setup button on the control panel, the screen displays three menus. Machine Status shows the supplies life, billing, counters and

reports. Admin Setting lets you set the advanced setup to use your machine in depth and conveniently. Usage Page Report can print the report on the amount of

printouts depending on the paper size and type.

Machine Status

Copy

Basic tab (Page 41)

Original Size

Reduce/Enlarge

Duplex

Output

Original Type

Darkness

Paper Supply

Advanced tab (Page 41)

ID Copy

N-Up

Poster Copy

Clone Copy

Book Copy

Booklet

Covers

Transparencies

WaterMark

Overlay

Auto Crop

Image tab (Page 42)

Erase Edge

Erase Background

Margin Shift

Fax

Basic tab (Page 60)

Address

Duplex

Resolution

Advanced tab (Page 61)

Original Size

Delay Send

Priority Send

Polling

Mailbox

Image tab (Page 61)

Original Type

Darkness

Erase Background

Color Mode

Scan

Scan to Email

Basic tab (Page 50)

Advanced tab

(Page 50)

Image tab (Page 50)

Output tab (Page 51)

Scan to PC

Scan to Server

Basic tab (Page 50)

Advanced tab

(Page 50)

Image tab (Page 50)

Output tab (Page 51)

Document Box

Public tab (Page 84)

Detail

Edit

Delete

Delete All

Secured tab (Page 84)

Detail

Edit

Delete

Delete All

USB

USB Format

USB Print

Scan to USB

Basic tab

Advanced tab

Image tab

Output tab

Admin Setting

Usage Page Report

When the display “Are you sure you want to print it?” shows, press “Yes”.

Job Status button

This menu shows the job in process, in waiting, in completed and the notice message such as an error. (See "Job Status button" on page 20.)

Supplies Life tab

(Page 75)

Toner Cartridge

Imaging Unit

Fuser Kit

Feed Roller Kit

Feed Roller Kit - Bypass

Tray

Document Feeder Roller

BTR Kit

DADF Friction Pad Kit

Machine Info tab

(Page 75)

Machine Details

Customer Support

Machine Serial

Number

IP Address

Hardware Options

Configuration

Software Versions

Tray Status

Tray

Status

Paper Size

Paper Type

Print/Report

System Report

Scan Report

Fax Report

Machine Info tab

(Continued)

Usage Counters

Total Impressions

Black Impressions

Black Copied

Impressions

Black Printed

Impressions

Sheets

Copied Sheets

Black Copied Sheets

Printed Sheets

Black Printed Sheets

2 Sided Sheets

Copied 2 Sided

Sheets

Machine Info tab

(Continued)

Black Copied 2-Sided

Sheets

Printed 2 Sided Sheets

Black Printed 2-Sided

Sheets

Analog Fax Sheets

Analog Fax 2-Sided

Sheets

Fax Image Received

Analog Fax Images

Sent

Analog Fax Images

Received

Images Sent

Network Scanning

Images Sent

Machine Info tab

(Continued)

Email Images Sent

Maintenance

Impressions

Black Maintenance

Impressions

General tab

(Page 76)

Device Info

Date & Time

Default Settings

Measurement

Timers

Language

Power Saver

Tray Management

Altitude Adjustment

Output Option

Contention Management

Sound

Supplies Management

Machine Test

On Demand Overwrite

HDD Spooling

Stored Job File Policy

Country

Setup tab

(Page 78)

Copy Setup

Fax Setup

Network Setup

Authentication

Optional Service

Document Box

Management

Print/Report tab

(Page 82)

Accounting Reports

Report

Current Job tab

Detail

Delete

Delete All

Completed Job tab

Detail

Active Notice tab

Detail

SUPPLIED SOFTWARE

After you have set up your machine and connected it to your computer, you

must install the printer software. If you are a Windows or Macintosh OS,

install the software from the supplied CD and if you are a Linux OS user,

download the software from the Samsung website (www.samsung.com/

printer) and install.

PRINTER DRIVER FEATURES

Your printer drivers support the following standard features:

• Paper orientation, size, source and media type selection

• Number of copies

In addition, you can use various special printing features. The following

table shows a general overview of features supported by your printer

drivers:

Printer driver

OS CONTENTS

Windows •Printer driver: Use this driver to take full

advantage of your printer’s features.

•Postscript Printer Definition (PPD) file: Use the

PostScript driver to print documents with complex

fonts and graphics in the PS language.

•Scanner driver: TWAIN and Windows Image

Acquisition (WIA) drivers are available for

scanning documents on your machine.

•Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor

the machine’s status and alerts you when an error

occurs during printing.

•SmarThru Officea: This is the accompanying

Windows-based software for your multifunctional

machine.

•

Scan and Fax Manager2

: This program allows you

to scan a document on your machine and save it to

a network-connected computer.

•Direct Printing Utility: This program allows you

to print PDF files directly.

•

SetIP

: Use this program to set your machine’s T

CP/

IP addresses. IPv6 is not supported by this

program.

a.Allows you to edit a scanned image in many ways using a powerful

image editor and to send the image by email. You can also open

another image editor program, like Adobe Photoshop, from SmarThru.

For details, please refer to the onscreen help supplied on the SmarThru

program.

Linux •Postscript Printer Description (PPD) file: Use

this file to run your machine from a Linux

computer and print documents.

•SANE: Use this driver to scan documents.

•Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor

the machine’s status and alerts you when an error

occurs during printing.

Macintosh •Postscript Printer Driver: Use the PostScript

driver to print documents with complex fonts and

graphics in the PS language.

•Scanner driver: TWAIN driver is available for

scanning documents on your machine.

•Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor

the machine’s status and alerts you when an error

occurs during printing.

FEATURE

PCL 6 POSTSCRIPT

WINDOWS WINDOWS LINUX MACINTOSH

Toner save OOOO

Machine quality

option

OOOO

Poster printing OXXX

Multiple pages

per sheet (N-up)

O O O (2, 4) O (2, 4, 6, 9,

16)

Fit to page

printing

OOOO

Scale printing OOOO

Different source

for first page

OXXO

Watermark OXXX

Overlay OXXX

Duplexa

a. The machine with Duplex feature prints both side of a paper.

OOOO

Secu Print OOXO

Scheduled Print OOXO

Spool Print OOXO

Proof Print OOXX

Stapler OOOO

getting started

This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the machine.

This chapter includes:

• Setting up the hardware

• Setting up the network

• System requirements

• Installing the software

• Machine's basic settings

• Understanding the keyboard

SETTING UP THE HARDWARE

This section shows the steps to set up the hardware which is explained in

the Quick Install Guide. Make sure you read Quick Install Guide and

complete following steps.

1. Select a stable location.

Select a level, stable place with adequate space for air circulation. Allow

extra space to open covers and trays.

The area should be well-ventilated and away from direct sunlight or

sources of heat, cold, and humidity. Do not set the machine close to the

edge of your desk or table.

Printing is suitable for altitudes under 1,000 m (3,281 ft). Refer to the

altitude setting to optimize your printing. See page 29 for more

information.

Place the machine on a flat, stable surface so that there is no incline

greater than 5 mm (0.02 inch). Otherwise, printing quality may be

affected.

2. Unpack the machine and check all the enclosed items.

3. Remove the tape holding the machine tightly.

4. Install both the print cartridge and imaging unit.

5. Load paper. (See "Loading paper" on page 38.)

6. Make sure that all the cables are connected to the machine.

7. Turn the machine on.

SETTING UP THE NETWORK

You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your

network printer. You can set up the basic network settings with the

machine's touch screen.

Supported operating systems

The following table shows the network environments supported by the

machine:

• When you move the machine, do not tilt or turn it upside down.

Otherwise, the inside of the machine may be contaminated by

toner, which can cause damage to the machine or bad printing

quality.

• If you are moving the machine or if machine is not in use for a long

time, turn on the power and wait until it goes in to the ready mode.

Then close the scan lid and turn the power off. And open the scan

lid and lock the scanner lock.

• This equipment will be inoperable when mains power fails.

If you want to use the USB cable, connect the cable between a

computer and you machine. Then, refer to Software section.

ITEM REQUIREMENTS

Network interface Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base-TX

Network operating system • Novell NetWare 5.x, 6.x (TCP/IP Only)

• Windows 2000/XP/2003/2008//7/Server

2008 R2

• Various Linux OS

• Mac OS 10.3 ~ 10.6

Network protocols TCP/IP

Dynamic addressing

server

DHCP, BOOTP

If you are in a non-static IP address environment and need to set up a

DHCP network protocol, go to http://developer.apple.com/networking/

bonjour/download/, select the Bonjour program that is appropriate for

your computer operating system and install the program. This program

will allow you to set network parameters automatically. Follow the

instructions in the installation window. This program does not support

Linux.

Configuring network protocol via the machine

You can set up TCP/IP network parameters, follow the steps listed below.

1. Make sure your machine is connected to the network with an RJ-45

Ethernet cable.

2. Make sure you have turned on the machine.

3. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

4. Press Admin Setting.

5. When the login message appears, enter password. Touch the password

input area, then the question marks appears. Use the number keypad on

the control panel to enter the password. Once the password is entered,

press OK. (Factory setting:1111)

6. Press the Setup tab > Network Setup.

7. Select TCP/IP Protocol.

• Ethernet Speed: You can select the communication speed for

Ethernet connections.

8. Press IP Setting.

9. Select Static and then enter IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway

address fields. Touch the input area then, enter addresses by number

keypad on the control panel.

10. Press OK.

SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

Before you begin, ensure that your system meets the following

requirements:

Windows

Contact the network administrator if you are not sure how to configure.

You can also set up the network settings through the network

administration programs.

•

SyncThru™ Web Admin Service

: Web-based printer

management solution for network administrators.

SyncThru™

Web Admin Service

provides you with an efficient way of

managing network devices and lets you remotely monitor and

troubleshoot network machines from any site with corporate

internet access. Download this program from http://

solution.samsungprinter.com.

•

SyncThru™ Web Service

: This is web server embedded on your

network printer. If you login with administrator’s ID and password

on the web server, it allows you to:

- Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to

connect to various network environemnts.

- Customize machine settings.

- Customize email settings and set up address book for scanning

to email.

- Customize server settings and set up address book for scanning

to the FTP or SMB servers.

- Customize printer, copy, and fax settings

•

SetIP

: Utility program allowing you to select a network interface

and manually configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP/IP

protocol. See "Using the SetIP program" on page 31.

REQUIREMENT (RECOMMENDED)

CPU RAM FREE HDD

SPACE

Windows 2000 Pentium II 400 MHz

(Pentium III 933 MHz)

64 MB

(128 MB)

600 MB

Windows XP Pentium III 933 MHz

(Pentium IV 1 GHz)

128 MB

(256 MB)

1.5 GB

Windows

Server 2003

Pentium III 933 MHz

(Pentium IV 1 GHz)

128 MB

(512 MB)

1.25 GB to

2 GB

Windows Pentium IV 3 GHz 512 MB

(1024 MB)

15 GB

Windows

Server 2008

Pentium IV 1 GHz

(Pentium IV 2 GHz)

512 MB

(2048 MB)

10 GB

Windows 7 Pentium IV 1 GHz 32-

bit or 64-bit processor

or higher

1 GB

(2 GB)

16 GB

• Support for DirectX 9 graphics with 128 MB

memory(to enable the Aero theme).

• DVD-R/W Drive

Windows

Server 2008

Pentium IV 1

GHz(x86) or

1.4GHz(x64)

processors(2GHz or

faster)

512 MB

(2048 MB)

10 GB

• Internet Explorer 5.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all

Windows operating systems.

• Users who have an administrator right can install the software.

•Windows Terminal Services is compatable with this machine.

Macintosh

Linux

INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE

You have to install the machine software for printing. The software includes

drivers, applications, and other user friendly programs.

1. Make sure that the network setup for your machine is completed. (See

"Setting up the network" on page 26.) All applications should be closed

on your computer before beginning installation.

2. Insert the Printer Software CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.

The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation window

appears.

If the installation window does not appear, click Start > Run. Type

X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents your drive

and click OK.

If you use Windows , Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, click

Start > All Programs > Accessories > Run, and type X:\Setup.exe.

If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows , Windows 7 and Windows

Server 2008 R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field,

and click Continue in the User Account Control window.

3. Click Next.

• The window above may slightly differ, if you are reinstalling the

driver.

4. Select Typical installation for a network printer, and then click Next.

OPERATIN

G SYSTEM

REQUIREMENT (RECOMMENDED)

CUP RAM FREE HDD

SPACE

Mac OS X

10.4 or lower

• PowerPC G4/

• Intel

processors

• 128 MB for a

PowerPC based

MAC (512 MB)

• 512 MB for an

Intel based MAC

(1 GB)

1GB

Mac OS X

10.5

• 867 MHz or

faster

PowerPC G4/

• Intel

processors

512 MB (1 GB) 1 GB

Mac OS X

10.6

• Intel

processors

1GB (2GB) 1GB

ITEM REQUIREMENTS

Operating system Red Hat 8 ~ 9

Fedora Core 1 ~ 4

Mandrake 9.2 ~ 10.1

SuSE 8.2 ~ 9.2

CPU Pentium IV 1 GHz or higher

RAM 256 MB or higher

free HDD space 1 GB or higher

Connection USB interface or Network interface

Software Linux Kernel 2.4 or higher

Glibc 2.2 or higher

CUPS

SANE

• It is necessary to claim swap partition of 300 MB or larger for

working with large scanned images.

• The Linux scanner driver supports the optical resolution at

maximum.

• The following procedure is for when the machine is being used as

a network machine. If you want to connect a machine with a USB

cable, refer to Software section.

• The following procedure is based on the Windows XP operating

system. The procedure and popup window which appears during

the installation may differ depending on the operating system, the

printer feature, or the interface in use. (See Software section.)

5. The list of machines available on the network appears. Select the printer

you want to install from the list and then click Next.

• If you click the Advanced button, you can search a printer with the

SNMP Community name. Default name is ‘public’.

• If you do not see your machine on the list, click Update to refresh the

list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your machine to the network.

To add the machine to the network, enter the port name and the IP

address for the machine.

To verify your machine’s IP address or the MAC address, print a

Network Configuration page. (See "Printing a report" on page 82.)

• To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select Shared Printer

[UNC] and enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer

by clicking the Browse button.

6. After the installation is finished, a window appears asking you to print a

test page and to register yourself as a user of Samsung machines in

order to receive information from Samsung. If you so desire, select the

corresponding checkbox(es) and click Finish.

MACHINE'S BASIC SETTINGS

After installation is complete, you may want to set the machine's default

settings. Refer to the next section if you would like to set or change values.

Altitude adjustment

The print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure, which is determined

by the height of the machine above sea level. The following information will

guide you on how to set your machine to the best print quality or best quality

of print.

Before you set the altitude value, find the altitude where you are using the

machine.

1. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go

to access the web site of your machine.

2. Click Machine Settings.

3. Click Altitude Adj.

4. Select the appropriate altitude value.

5. Click Apply.

If you are not sure of the IP address, contact your network

administrator or print network information. (See "Printing a

report" on page 82.)

• If your machine does not work properly after the installation, try

to reinstall the printer driver. See Software section.

• During the printer driver installation process, the driver installer

detects the location information for your operating system and

sets the default paper size for your machine. If you use a

different Windows location, you must change the paper size to

match the paper you usually use. Go to printer properties to

change the paper size after installation is complete.

1Normal

2High 1

3High 2

4High 3

Setting the authentication password

To set your machine up or change the settings, you have to login. To

change password, follow the next steps.

1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

2. Press Admin Setting.

3. When the login message appears, enter password. Touch the password

input area, then the question marks appears, use the number keypad on

the control panel to enter the password. Then, press OK. (Factory

setting:1111)

4. Press the Setup tab > Authentication.

5. Press

Change Admin. Password

6. Enter old and new password, and then confirm the new password.

7. Press OK.

Setting the date and time

When you set the time and date, they are used in Delay fax and Delay Print,

also they are printed on reports. If, however, they are not correct, you need

to change it for correct time being.

1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

2. Press Admin Setting.

3. When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad

and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 30.)

4. Press the General tab > Date & Time > Date & Time.

5. Select date and time using left/right arrows. Or touch the insert area and

use the numeric keypad on the control panel.

6. Press OK.

Changing the display language

To change the language that appears on the display, refer to the following

steps.

1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

2. Press Admin Setting.

3. When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad

and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 30.)

4. Press the General tab.

5. Press the down arrow to switch the screen and press Language.

6. Select the desired language.

7. Press OK.

Setting job timeout

When there is no input for a certain period of time, the machine exits the

current location. You can set the amount of time the machine will wait.

1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

2. Press Admin Setting.

3. When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad

and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 30.)

4. Press the General tab.

5. Press Timers.

6. Select System Timeout.

• You can set the Held Job Timeout option to over one hour.

7. Select On.

8. Select a duration using left/right arrows.

9. Press OK.

Using energy saving feature

The machine provides energy saving features.

1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

2. Press Admin Setting.

3. When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad

and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 30.)

4. Press the General tab.

5. Press down arrow to switch the screen, press Power Saver.

6. Select appropriate option and time.

•Scan Power Save: Turns off the scanner lamp under the glass.

•Low Power Save: Keeps the temperature of the fuser unit under

100 °C, and turns off the fans within the machine except a core fan

for the fuser unit.

•Power Save: Turns off all the fans even for the fuser unit after

certain time.

7. Press OK.

Setting the default tray and paper

You can select the tray and paper you would like to keep using for printing

job. (See "General settings" on page 76.)

1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

2. Press Admin Setting.

3. When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad

and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 30.)

4. Press the General tab.

5. Press the down arrow to switch the screen and press Tray

Management.

6. Select tray and its options such as paper size and type.

7. Press OK.

If power to the machine is cut off, you need to reset the correct time

and date once the power has been restored.

To change the format of date and time, press Date Format and Time

Format.

Changing the default settings

You can set the default values for copy, fax, email, scan and paper all at

once.

1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

2. Press Admin Setting.

3. When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad

and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 30.)

4. Press the General tab > Default Settings > Default Option.

5. Press the function you want to change, and change its settings.

For example, if you want to change the default setting of the brightness

& darkness for a copy job, press Copy > Darkness and adjust the

brightness & darkness.

6. Press OK.

Using the SetIP program

This program is for the network IP setting using the MAC address which is

the hardware serial number of the network printer card or interface.

Especially, it helps the network administrator set several network IPs at the

same time.

The following procedure is based on windows XP. If you use Macintosh or

Linux OS, see Software section

Installing the program

1. Insert the driver CD provided along with your machine. When the driver

CD runs automatically, close the window.

2. Start Windows Explorer and open the X drive. (X represents the name

of your CD-ROM drive.)

3. Double-click Application > SetIP.

4. Open the folder of the language you plan to use.

5. Double-click Setup.exe to install this program.

6. Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the installation.

Setting network values

1. Print the machine’s network configuration report to find your machine’s

MAC address. (See "Printing a report" on page 82.)

2. From the Windows Start menu, select All Programs > Samsung

Network Printer Utilities > SetIP.

3. Click to open the TCP/IP configuration window.

4. Enter the network card's MAC address, IP address, subnet mask,

default gateway, and then click Apply.

5. Click OK, and then the machine prints the network information. Check

all the settings are correct.

6. Click Exit.

If the optional tray is not installed, the tray options on the screen is

grayed out.

• You can only use SetIP program when your machine is connected

to a network.

• The following procedure is based on the Windows XP operating

system. If you are using Macintosh or Linux, See Software section.

• If you are in a non-static IP address environment and need to

setup a DHCP network protocol, go to the http://

developer.apple.com/networking/bonjour/download/, select the

program Bonjour for Windows due to your computer operating

system, and install the program. This program will allow you to fix

the network parameter automatically. Follow the instruction in the

installation window. This Bonjour program does not support Linux

• You can only use IPv4 setting for SetIP.

When you enter the MAC address, enter it without a colon(:).

UNDERSTANDING THE KEYBOARD

You can enter alphabet characters, numbers, or special symbols using the

keyboard on the touch screen. This keyboard is specially arranged like a

normal keyboard for better usability for the user.

Touch the input area where you need to enter characters and the keyboard

pops up on the screen. The keyboard below is the default showing the

lowercase letters.

1Left/Right Moves the cursor between characters in the input

area.

2Backspace Deletes the character on the left side of the

cursor.

3Delete Deletes the character on the right side of the

cursor.

4Clear Deletes all characters in the input area.

5Input area Enters letters within this line.

6Shift Toggles between lowercase keys and uppercase

keys or vice versa.

7Symbols Switches from the alphanumeric keyboard to the

symbol keyboard.

8Space Enters a blank between characters.

9OK Saves and closes input result.

10 Cancel Cancels and closes input result.

If you enter the email address, then the keyboard for email pops up.

After you enter the address, press OK to activate entered address.

Press the arrow key on the side for rotating between From, To, Cc,

Bcc, Subject, Message in order.

loading originals and print media

This chapter introduces you to how to load originals and print media into your machine.

This chapter includes:

• Loading originals

• Selecting print media

• Loading paper

• Setting the paper size and type

LOADING ORIGINALS

You can use the scanner glass or DADF to load an original for copying,

scanning, and sending a fax.

On the scanner glass

Make sure that no originals are in the DADF. If an original is detected in the

DADF, the machine gives it priority over the original on the scanner glass.

To get the best scan quality, especially for colored or gray-scaled images,

use the scanner glass.

1. Lift and open the scanner lid.

2. Place the original face down on the scanner glass and align it with the

registration guide at the top left corner of the glass.

3. Close the scanner lid.

In the DADF

Using the DADF, you can load up to 100 sheets of paper (75 g/m2, 20 lb) for

one job.

When you use the DADF:

• Do not load paper smaller than 174 x 128 mm (5.6 x 5.8 inches) or

larger than 218 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches).

• Do not attempt to load the following types of paper:

- carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper

- coated paper

- onion skin or thin paper

- wrinkled or creased paper

- curled or rolled paper

- torn paper

• Remove all staples and paper clips before loading.

• Make sure any glue, ink, or correction fluid on the paper is completely

dry before loading.

• Do not load originals that include different sizes or weights of paper.

• Do not load booklets, pamphlets, transparencies, or documents having

other unusual characteristics.

To load an original into the DADF:

1. Load the original face up into the DADF. Make sure that the bottom of

the original stack matches the paper size marked on the document input

tray.

• Leaving the scanner lid open while copying may affect copy quality

and toner consumption.

• Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the printout.

Always keep it clean. (See "Cleaning the scan unit" on page 84.)

• If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the scanner

lid until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the lid.

If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start copying with

the lid open.

2. Adjust the document width guides to the paper size. SELECTING PRINT MEDIA

You can print on a variety of print media, such as plain paper, envelopes,

labels, and transparencies. Always use print media that meet the guidelines

for use with your machine. Print media that does not meet the guidelines

outlined in this user’s guide may cause the following problems:

• Poor print quality

• Increased paper jams

• Premature wear on the machine.

Properties, such as weight, composition, grain, and moisture content, are

important factors that affect the machine’s performance and the output

quality. When you choose print materials, consider the following:

• The type, size and weight of the print media for your machine are

described later in this section.

• Desired outcome: The print media you choose should be appropriate for

your project.

• Brightness: Some print media are whiter than others and produce

sharper, more vibrant images.

• Surface smoothness: The smoothness of the print media affects how

crisp the printing looks on the paper.

Dust on the DADF glass may cause black lines on the printout. Always

keep it clean.

• Some print media may meet all of the guidelines in this section and

still not produce satisfactory results. This may be the result of

improper handling, unacceptable temperature and humidity levels,

or other variables over which Samsung has no control.

• Before purchasing large quantities of print media, ensure that

meets the requirements specified in this user’s guide.

Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause

problems, requiring repairs. Such repairs are not covered by

Samsung’s warranty or service agreements.

Specification on print media

TYPE SIZE DIMENSIONS WEIGHTACAPACITYB

Plain paper Letter 216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches) • 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb

bond) for the tray

• 60 to 220 g/m2 (16 to 58 lb

bond) for the multi-purpose

tray

• 60 to 120 g/m2 (16 to 32 lb

bond) for the high capacity

feeder

• 520 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb

bond) paper for the tray

• 100 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb

bond) in the multi-purpose tray

• 2,100 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb

bond) in the high capacity

feederc

Legal 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)

Folio 216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches)

A4 210 x 297 mm (8.26 x 11.69 inches)

Oficio 216 x 343 mm (8.5 x 13.5 inches)

JIS B5 182 x 257 mm (7.16 x 10.11 inches)

ISO B5 176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 inches)

Executive 184 x 267 mm (7.25 x 10.5 inches)

A5 148 x 210 mm (5.82 x 8.26 inches)

Statement 140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 inches)

A6 105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.82 inches)

Envelope Envelope B5 176 x 250 mm (6.92 x 9.84 inches) 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb

bond)

• 50 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb)

paper for the tray

• 10 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) in

the multi-purpose tray

Envelope Monarch 98 x 191 mm (3.87 x 7.5 inches)

Envelope No. 10 105 x 241 mm (4.12 x 9.5 inches)

Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 inches)

Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm (6.37 x 9.01 inches)

Envelope C6 114 x 162 mm (4.48 x 6.38 inches)

Transparency Letter, A4, Oficio Refer to the Plain paper section 138 to 146 g/m2 (37 to 39 lb) • 100 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb)

paper for the tray

• 20 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) in

the multi-purpose tray

Labels Letter, Legal, Folio,

A4, JIS B5, ISO B5,

Executive, A5,

Statement, Oficio, A6

Refer to the Plain paper section 120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40 lb

bond)

• 100 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb)

paper for the tray

• 10 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) in

the multi-purpose tray

Card stock Letter, Legal, Folio,

A4, JIS B5, ISO B5,

Executive, A5,

Statement, Oficio, A6,

Post Card 4x6

Refer to the Plain paper section 90 to 220 g/m2 (24 to 58 lb

bond)

• 50 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb)

paper for the tray

• 10 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) in

the multi-purpose tray

Minimum size (custom) 98 x 148 mm (3.86 x 5.83 inches) 60 to 220 g/m2 (16 to 58 lb bond)

Maximum size (custom) 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)

a.If media weight is over 105 g/m2 (28 lb bond), use the multi-purpose tray.

b.Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight, thickness, and environmental conditions.

c. High capacity feeder is not supported A6.

Media sizes supported in each mode Guidelines for special print media

MODE SIZE SOURCE

Copy mode Letter, A4, Legal,

Oficio, Folio,

Executive, JIS B5, A5,

• tray 1

• optional tray 2

• multi-purpose tray

• high capacity feeder

Single side printing All sizes supported by

the machine

•tray1

• optional tray

• multi-purpose tray

• high capacity feeder

Duplex printinga

a.75 to 90 g/m2 (20 ~ 24 lb) only

Letter, A4, Legal, Folio,

Oficio, JIS B5, ISO B5,

Executive, A5,

Statement

•tray1

• optional tray

• multi-purpose tray

• high capacity feeder

Fax modeb

b.Only the optional fax kit is installed.

Letter, A4, Legal • tray 1

• optional tray

• high capacity feeder

MEDIA TYPE GUIDELINES

Envelopes • Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the

quality of the envelopes. When selecting envelopes,

consider the following factors:

- Weight: The weight of the envelope paper should

not exceed 90 g/m2 or jamming may occur.

- Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes should

lie flat with less than 6 mm curl, and should not

contain air.

- Condition: Envelopes should not be wrinkled,

nicked, or otherwise damaged.

- Temperature: You should use envelopes that are

compatible with the heat and pressure of the

machine during operation.

• Use only well-constructed envelopes with sharp and

well creased folds.

• Do not use stamped envelopes.

• Do not use envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows,

coated lining, self-adhesive seals, or other synthetic

materials.

• Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes.

• Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope

extends all the way to the corner of the envelope.

1Acceptable

2Unacceptable

• Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with

more than one flap that folds over to seal must use

adhesives compatible with the machine’s fusing

temperature for 0.1 second. Check your machine’s

specification to view the fusing temperature, see

page see "General specifications" on page 115. The

extra flaps and strips might cause wrinkling,

creasing, or jams, and may even damage the fuser.

• For the best print quality, position margins no closer

than 15 mm from the edges of the envelope.

• Avoid printing over the area where the envelope’s

seams meet.

CHANGING THE SIZE OF THE PAPER IN THE

PAPER TRAY

To load longer sizes of paper, such as Legal-sized paper, you need to

adjust the paper guides to extend the paper tray.

1. Adjust the paper length guide to the desired paper length. It is preset

to Letter or A4 size depending on the country. To load another size,

hold the lever and move the length guide to the corresponding

position.

Transparencies

• To avoid damaging the machine, use only

transparencies designed for use in laser printers.

• Transparencies used in the machine must be able

to withstand 180 °C, the machine’s fusing

temperature.

• Place them on a flat surface after removing them

from the machine.

• Do not leave them in the paper tray for long periods

of time. Dust and dirt may accumulate on them,

resulting in spotty printing.

• To avoid smudging caused by fingerprints, handle

them carefully.

• To avoid fading, do not expose printed

transparencies to prolonged sunlight.

• Ensure that transparencies are not wrinkled, curled,

or have any torn edges.

Labels • To avoid damaging the machine, use only labels

designed for use in laser machines.

- When selecting labels, consider the following fac-

tors:

- Adhesives: The adhesive material should be sta-

ble at your machine’s fusing temperature. Check

your machine’s specification to view the fusing

temperature, see page 115.

- Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed

backing between them. Labels can peel off sheets

that have spaces between the labels, causing

serious jams.

- Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no

more than 13 mm of curl in any direction.

- Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bub-

bles, or other indications of separation.

• Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive

material between labels. Exposed areas can cause

labels to peel off during printing, which can cause

paper jams. Exposed adhesive can also cause

damage to machine components.

• Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine

more than once. The adhesive backing is designed

for only a single pass through the machine.

• Do not use labels that are separating from the

backing sheet or are wrinkled, bubbled, or otherwise

damaged.

Card stock or

custom-sized

materials

• Do not print on media smaller than 98 mm wide or

356 mm long.

• In the software application, set margins at least

6.4 mm away from the edges of the material.

MEDIA TYPE GUIDELINES

Preprinted

paper

• Letterhead must be printed with heat-resistant ink

that will not melt, vaporize, or release hazardous

emissions when subjected to the printer’s fusing

temperature for 0.1 second. Check your machine’s

specification to view the fusing temperature, see

page 115.

• Letterhead ink must be non-flammable and should

not adversely affect printer rollers.

• Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a

moisture-proof wrapping to prevent changes during

storage.

• Before you load preprinted paper, such as forms

and letterhead, verify that the ink on the paper is

dry. During the fusing process, wet ink can come off

preprinted paper, reducing print quality.

1paper length guide

2paper width guide

If you have installed an optional high capacity feeder, refer to Quick

Install Sheet to adjust paper size.

MEDIA TYPE GUIDELINES

2. After inserting paper into the tray, while pinching the paper width

guide as shown, move it toward the stack of paper until it lightly

touches the side of the stack. Do not press the guide too tightly to the

edge of the paper; the guide may bend the paper.

When you use legal-sized paper, you need to extend the length of the

tray.

3. Load the paper into the tray.

4. Place the tray into the machine.

5. Set the paper size from your computer.

LOADING PAPER

Loading paper in tray 1, optional tray or optional

high capacity feeder

Load the print media you use for the majority of your print jobs in the tray 1.

The tray 1 can hold a maximum of 520 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond) plain

paper.

You can purchase an optional tray and attach it below the standard tray to

load an additional 520 sheets of paper. (See "Supplies" on page 110.)

1. To load paper, pull and open the paper tray and place paper with the

side you want to print facing down.

2. After loading paper, set the paper type and size for the tray 1. See

"Setting the paper size and type" on page 40 for copying and faxing or

Software section for PC-printing.

• Do not push the paper width guides far enough to cause the

materials to warp.

• If you do not adjust the paper width guides, it may cause paper

jams.

Using photographic paper or coated paper may cause problems,

requiring repairs. Such repairs are not covered by Samsung’s

warranty or service agreement.

1Full

2Empty

Place the side to be printed facing up.

ENVELOPE PREPRINTED

PAPER TRANSPARENCY

PUNCHED PAPER CARD STOCK LETTERHEAD

PAPER

LABEL

• If you experience problems with paper feed, place one sheet at a

time in the multi-purpose tray.

• You can load previously printed paper. The printed side should be

facing up with an uncurled edge at the front. If you experience

problems with paper feed, turn the paper around. Note that print

quality is not guaranteed.

In the multi-purpose tray

The multi-purpose tray can hold special sizes and types of print material,

such as postcards, note cards, and envelopes. It is useful for single page

printing on letterhead or colored paper.

Tips on using the multi-purpose tray

• Load only one size of print media at a time in the multi-purpose tray.

• To prevent paper jams, do not add paper when there is still paper in

the multi-purpose tray. This also applies to other types of print

media.

• Print media should be loaded face down with the top edge going into

the multi-purpose tray first and be placed in the center of the tray.

• Always load only the specified print media to avoid paper jams and

print quality problems. (See "Selecting print media" on page 34.)

• Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes, and labels before loading

them into the multi-purpose tray.

To load paper in the multi-purpose tray:

1. Open the multi-purpose tray and unfold the multi-purpose tray

extension, as shown.

2. If you are using paper, flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to

separate the pages before loading.

For transparencies, hold them by the edges and avoid touching the

print side. Oils from your fingers can cause print quality problems.

3. Load the paper.

Place the side to be printed facing down.

ENVELOPE PREPRINTED

PAPER TRANSPARENCY

PUNCHED PAPER CARD STOCK LETTERHEAD

PAPER

LABEL

4. Squeeze the multi-purpose tray paper width guides and adjust them

to the width of the paper. Do not force too much, or the paper will be

bent, which will result in a paper jam or skew.

5. After loading paper, set the paper type and size for the multi-purpose

tray. See "Setting the paper size and type" on page 40 for copying

and faxing or the Software section for PC-printing.

6. After printing, fold the multi-purpose tray extension and close the

multi-purpose tray.

SETTING THE PAPER SIZE AND TYPE

After loading paper in the paper tray, you need to set the paper size and

type. These settings will apply to Copy and Fax modes.

For PC-printing, you need to select the paper size and type in the

application program you use on your PC.

1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

2. Press Admin Setting.

3. When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad

and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 30.)

4. Press the General tab.

5. Press the down arrow to switch the screen, press Tray Management.

6. Select tray and its options such as paper size and type.

7. Press OK.

Depending on the media type you are using, keep the following

loading guidelines:

• Envelopes: Flap side down and with the stamp area on the

top left side.

• Transparencies: Print side up and the top with the adhesive

strip entering the machine first.

• Labels: Print side up and top short edge entering the machine

first.

• Preprinted paper: Design side up with the top edge toward the

machine.

• Card stock: Print side up and the short edge entering the

machine first.

• Previously printed paper: Previously printed side down with

an uncurled edge toward the machine.

The settings made from the printer driver override the settings on

the control panel.

copying

This chapter gives you information about using your machine as a copy machine.

This chapter includes

• Understanding the Copy screen

• Copying originals

• Changing the settings for each copy

• Using special copy features

UNDERSTANDING THE COPY SCREEN

When you press Copy on the Main screen, the Copy screen appears which

has several tabs and lost of copying options. All the options are grouped by

features so that you can configure your selections easily.

If the screen displays an other menu, press ( ) to go to the Main screen.

Basic tab

•Original Size: Selects the size of the originals. (See "Changing the

size of originals" on page 42.)

•Reduce/Enlarge: Reduces or enlarges the size of a copied image.

(See "Reducing or enlarging copies" on page 43.)

•Duplex: Sets the machine to print copies on both sides of the paper.

(See "Copying on both sides of originals (Duplex)" on page 43.)

•Output: Selects Collated or Uncollated copy options. If you install

the optional stacker & stapler, then the staple related option appears.

(See "Deciding the form of copy output (Collated / Staple)" on

page 44.)

•Original Type: Improves the copy quality by selecting the document

type for the current copy job. (See "Selecting the type of originals" on

page 44.)

•Light, Dark: Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy that is

easier to read, when the original contains faint markings and dark

images. (See "Changing the darkness" on page 44.)

•Paper Supply: Selects the paper supply tray.

Advanced tab

•ID Copy: Prints 2-sided originals on one sheet of paper. This feature

is helpful for copying a small-sized item, such as a business card.

(See "ID card copying" on page 44.)

•N-Up: Prints 2 or 4 original images, reduced to fit onto one sheet of

paper. (See "Copying ID with the manual ID copy option" on

page 45.)

•Poster Copy: Prints a large image into divided 9 pages. (See

"Poster copying" on page 45.)

•Clone Copy: Prints multiple image copies from the original

document on a single page. (See "Clone copying" on page 46.)

•Book Copy: Allows you to copy an entire book. (See "Book

copying" on page 46.)

•Booklet: Creates booklets from a sequential set of either 1-sided or

2-sided originals. (See "Booklet copying" on page 46.)

•Covers: Automatically adds covers to your copied set using stock

taken from a different tray. (See "Cover copying" on page 47.)

•Transparencies: Adds a blank or printed divider between

transparencies within a set. (See "Transparency copying" on

page 47.)

•WaterMark: Prints an image with the added watermark. (See

"Watermark copying" on page 48.)

•Overlay: Prints an image with the image previously stored in your

machine. (See "Overlay copying" on page 48.)

•Auto Crop: Prints only the image of an original after cropping the

blank parts like the margin. (See "Auto crop copying" on page 48.)

Image tab

•Erase Edge: Allows you to erase punch holes, staple marks, and

fold creases along any of the four documents edges. (See "Erasing

edges" on page 47.)

•Erase Background: Prints an image with no background. (See

"Erasing background images" on page 47.)

•Margin Shift: Creates a binding edge for the document. (See

"Shifting margins" on page 47.)

COPYING ORIGINALS

This is the normal and usual procedure for copying your originals.

1. Press Copy from the Main screen.

2. Place originals, face up, in the DADF, or you can use the scanner glass

with a single original document face down.

3. Adjust the settings for each copy such as Original Size, Reduce/

Enlarge, Duplex and more. (See "Changing the size of originals" on

page 42., see "Copying on both sides of originals (Duplex)" on page 43.)

4. Select the tray by pressing the appropriate tray on screen.

5. Enter the number of copies using the number keypad, if necessary.

6. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.

CHANGING THE SETTINGS FOR EACH COPY

On the Basic tab of the Copy screen, you can select copy features before

starting to copy.

Changing the size of originals

Press the Basic tab > Original Size, then use left/right arrows to set the

original size.

Press more to see the detail values.

•Custom: Selects the scanning area of the original. Press the

cardinal point arrows to set the size.

•Auto: Automatically detects the size of originals, but this option

supports only when originals are Legal, Letter, or A5 sized. If the

originals is mixed-sized, then the machine detects the largest original

size and select the largest-sized paper in the tray.

•Mixed Size (Letter & Legal): Allows for the use of both of Letter and

Legal sized papers together, and the machine uses the proper-sized

paper from several trays. For example, if the originals are total 3

pages, 1st page is the letter-sized paper, 2nd page is the legal-sized

If you want to copy originals on the scanner glass and copy more than

two copies, the message Another Page? appears after the first page

copied. At this time, if you select No, the machine starts copying the

rest of your originals and sorts the copied papers in order. Because

the default value of theOutput option is Collated.

To cancel the current copy job, press Stop on the control panel. Or

you can delete the current and pending job using Job Status on the

control panel. Select the job you want to cancel and press Delete.

The Basic tab setting is only for each copy. That means that the

setting does not apply to the next copy job. After finishing the current

copy job, the machine automatically restores the default settings after

certain time. Or the machine resume to default setting when you press

the Clear All button on the control panel or when you press other

menu such as fax or else except the Job Status screen.

The default copy setting can be changed in Admin Setting. (See

"General settings" on page 76.)

paper, and 3rd page is the letter-sized paper, then the machine

prints the output first letter, legal, and letter in order from several

trays.

• Other preset values: Allows user to easily select commonly used

values.

Reducing or enlarging copies

Press the Basic tab > Reduce/Enlarge, then use left/right arrows to reduce

or enlarge an image on the paper.

Press more to see the values.

•Original(100%): Prints texts or images the same size as originals.

•Auto Fit: Reduces or enlarges the original based on the size of the

output paper.

• Other preset values: Allows you to easily select commonly used

values.

Copying on both sides of originals (Duplex)

Press the Basic tab > Duplex, then use left/right arrows to select Duplex

value.

Press more to see the detail values.

•1 -> 1 Sided: Scans one side of an original and prints on one side of

the paper, this function produces exactly the same print out from

originals.

•1 -> 2 Sided: Scans one side of originals and prints them on both

sides of the paper.

•1 -> 2 Sided, Rotate Side 2: Scans one side of the originals and

prints on both sides of the paper, but the information on the back

side of the print out is rotated 180°.

•2 -> 1 Sided: Scans both sides of the originals and prints each of

one on a separate sheet.

•2 -> 2 Sided: Scans both sides of the original and prints on both

sides of the paper. This function produces exactly the same print out

from the originals.

•2 -> 1 Sided, Rotate Side 2: Scans both sides of the original and

prints each one on a separate sheet, but the information on the back

side of the printout is rotated 180°.

•Reverse 1 ->2 Sided: Scans originals and prints them on both sides

of a paper. But the machine reverses the print out order of the

originals. The machine prints the second original first, which means

the firstly input original is printed on the back side of a paper. For

instance, if you print 6 sheet of original papers, every even

numbered pages of originals will be printed on the front side of a

paper, and every odd numbered pages of originals will be printed on

the back side of a paper.

•Reverse 1 -> 2 Sided, Rotate Side 2: Scans originals and prints

them on both sides of a paper. But the machine reverses the print

out order of the originals. The machine prints the second original

first, which means the firstly input original is printed on the back side

of a paper. For instance, if you print 6 sheet of original papers, every

even numbered pages of originals will be printed on the front side of

a paper, and every odd numbered pages of originals will be printed

on the back side of a paper. The information on the back side of the

print out is rotated 180°.

•Reverse 2 -> 2 Sided: Scans the both sides of originals and prints

them on both sides of a paper. But the machine reverses the print

out order of the originals. The machine prints the back sides of

originals first, which means the front sides of originals is printed on

the back side of a paper.

The Custom option is different depending on where the originals is

placed. In the DADF, 25~200% adjustment is possible. And in the

scanner glass, 25~400% adjustment is possible.

If you want to copy originals on the scanner glass and copy both sides

of originals, the message Another Page? appears after the first page

copied. At this time, load the original's the other side facing down and

press Yes, then the machine starts scanning the second page of your

original.

Deciding the form of copy output (Collated / Staple)

Press the Basic tab > Output, then use left/right arrows to select Collated

or Stapled. This feature is supported only when the original is on the DADF.

Press more to see the values.

•Collated: Prints output in sets to match the sequence of originals.

•Uncollated: Prints output sorted into stacks of individual pages.

•Staple, Portrait: Adds a single staple to all of your portrait-oriented

output.

•Staple, Landscape: Adds a single staple to all of your landscape-

oriented output.

Selecting the type of originals

Press the Basic tab and select an appropriate original type.

•Text: Use for originals containing mostly text.

•Text/Photo: Use for originals with mixed text and photographs.

•Photo: Use when originals are photographs.

Changing the darkness

This defines the degree of darkness. Use left/right arrows to change the

level of light/dark in the printouts.

USING SPECIAL COPY FEATURES

On the Advanced tab or the Image tab of the Copy screen, you can select

specific copy features.

ID card copying

The machine prints one side of the original on the upper half of the paper

and the other side on the lower half without reducing the size of the original.

This feature is helpful for copying a small-sized item, such as a business

card.

This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner

glass.

1. Place the front side of an original facing down on the scanner glass

where arrows indicate as shown, and close the scanner lid.

2. Press Copy from the Main screen.

3. Select the tray in Paper Supply.

4. Press the Advanced tab > ID Copy.

5. Press Start on the control panel.

Then the machine starts scanning the front side.

6. Turn the original over and place it on the scanner glass, where arrows

indicate as shown. Then, close the scanner lid.

7. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.

If you want to copy originals on the scanner glass and copy both sides

of originals, the message Another Page? appears after the first page

copied. At this time, load the original's the other side facing down and

press Yes, then the machine starts scanning the second page of your

original.

The Staple feature is available with an optional stacker & stapler. (See

"Stacker & Stapler (Finisher)" on page 110.)

The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this feature.

Copying ID with the manual ID copy option

If you want to copy several ID cards on a paper, or adjust the copying position

of the page, follow the next steps.

Next steps are the procedure when you copy two people's driver's license

cards (100mm X 80mm) in one page.

1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

2Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter

password and press OK.

3 Press the Setup tab > Copy Setup > Mamual ID Copy Setup.

4 Press the number from the template list table.

5 Press Edit Template.

6 Selec the appropriate option values and press OK.

•Template Name: Enter the template name.

•Scan Position: Select the position for scanning. You should select the

largest scanning position out of the originals.

LEFT, TOP : X-000mm/Y-000mm, RIGHT, BOTTOM: X-110mm/Y-

090mm

•Number of Images: Select how many images are on a page. (select

number 4.)

•Image Position: Select the position of a page which images are on. If

you choose to copy four images, you have to select four positions

here.

•First Image Position: LEFT, TOP : X-000mm/Y-020mm, RIGHT,

BOTTOM: X-100mm/Y-100mm

•Second Image Position: LEFT, TOP : X-105mm/Y-020mm, RIGHT,

BOTTOM: X-205mm/Y-100mm

•Third Image Position: LEFT, TOP : X-000mm/Y-150mm, RIGHT,

BOTTOM: X-100mm/Y-230mm

•Forth Image Position: LEFT, TOP : X-105mm/Y-150mm, RIGHT,

BOTTOM: X-205mm/Y-230mm

7 Press OK, the template you have saved will be shown in the template

list table.

8 Press and select Copy.

9 Press the Advanced tab > ID Copy > Mamual ID Copy Setup.

10 Press the template you have saved from the template list.

11 Press the Start button on the control panel. now follow the instruction

on display to finish the ID copy for four images

2-up or 4-up copying (N-up)

The machine reduces the size of the original images and prints 2 or 4 pages

onto one sheet of paper.

2 or 4-up copying is available only when you load originals into the DADF.

1. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original face

down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading originals" on page 33.)

2. Press Copy from the Main screen.

3. Select the tray in Paper Supply.

4. Press the Advanced tab > N-Up.

5. Select Off, 2Up, or 4Up.

•Off: Copies an original onto one sheet of paper.

•2Up: Copies two separate originals onto one page.

•4Up: Copies four separate originals onto one page.

6. Press Start on the control panel.

Poster copying

Your original will be divided into 9 portions. You can paste the printed pages

together to make one poster-sized document. This copy feature is available

only when you place originals on the scanner glass. Each portion is

scanned and printed on by one in the following order.

This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner

glass.

• If the original is larger than the printable area, some portions may

not be printed.

• If this option is grayed out, select the Duplex option to 1 -> 1

Sided, the Output option to Collated.

You cannot adjust the copy size using the Reduce/Enlarge for the N-

Up feature.

1 2

3 4

1. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading

originals" on page 33.)

2. Press Copy from the Main screen.

3. Select the tray in Paper Supply.

4. Press the Advanced tab > Poster Copy.

5. Press On to activate this feature.

6. Press OK.

7. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.

Clone copying

The machine prints multiple original images on a single page. The number

of images is automatically determined by the original image and the paper

size.

This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner

glass.

1. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading

originals" on page 33.)

2. Press Copy from the Main screen.

3. Select the tray in Paper Supply.

4. Press the Advanced tab > Clone Copy.

5. Press On to activate this feature.

6. Press OK.

7. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.

Book copying

Use this feature to copy a book. If the book is too thick, lift the scanner lid

until its hinges are engaged by the stopper and then close the scanner lid. If

the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm(1.18 inches), start copying with

the scanner lid open.

This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner

glass.

1. Place the originals face down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading

originals" on page 33.)

2. Press Copy from the Main screen.

3. Press the Advanced tab > Book Copy.

4. Select the binding option.

•Off: Disables this feature.

•Left Page: Prints left page of the book.

•Right Page: Prints right page of the book.

•Both Page: Prints both facing pages of the book.

5. Press OK.

6. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.

Booklet copying

The machine automatically prints on one or both sides of the paper,

which are then folded to produce a booklet with all of the pages in

the correct sequence.

The machine will also reduce and correctly adjust the position of each

image to fit on the selected paper.

1. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original face

down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading originals" on page 33.)

2. Press Copy from the Main screen.

3. Select the tray in Paper Supply.

4. Press the Advanced tab > Booklet.

5. Press On to use this feature, and select detailed settings for each

option.

•1 Sided Original: Copies on one side of the paper.

•2 Sided Original: Copies on both sides of the paper.

This feature is available only when the options in the Basic tab are

selected as below;

-Duplex to 1 -> 1 Sided

-Reduce/Enlarge to Original(100%)

-Paper Supply to Tray.

Your original is divided into 9 portions. Each portion is scanned and

printed one by one in the following order:

This feature is available only when the options in the Basic tab are

selected as below;

-Duplex to 1 -> 1 Sided

-Reduce/Enlarge to Original(100%)

-Paper Supply to Tray.

To remove shadows of a book edge, press the Image tab > Erase

Edge > Book Center and Edges Erase.

6. Press OK.

7. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.

Cover copying

The machine automatically adds covers to your copied set using stock taken

from a different tray. Covers must be the same size and orientation as the

main body of the job.

1. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original face

down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading originals" on page 33.)

2. Press Copy from the Main screen.

3. Select the tray in Paper Supply.

4. Press the Advanced tab > Covers.

5. Press On to use this feature, and select detailed settings for each

option.

•Position: Selects whether the cover will be placed at the front, back,

or both.

•Cover Sheet: Selects whether the cover will be 1 sided, 2 sided, or

blank paper.

•Paper Source: Select the paper tray, where the cover sheet is

loaded.

6. Press OK.

7. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.

Transparency copying

When you prepare transparencies for presentations, use this feature to copy

the information.

1. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original face

down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading originals" on page 33.)

2. Load the right-sized transparencies into the tray you have set.

3. Set the paper type to Transparency.

4. Press Copy from the Main screen.

5. Press the Advanced tab > Transparencies.

6. Select Transparencies option.

•No Separator: Does not place separator sheets between

transparencies.

•Blank Sheet: Places a blank sheet between transparencies.

•Printed Sheet: Places the same image on the divider sheets as

printed on the transparency.

7. Select media sources, in case you selected either Blank Sheet or

Printed Sheet.

8. Press OK.

9. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.

Erasing edges

You can copy the original without any edges or margins.

1. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. Or load the

originals face up in the DADF. (See "Loading originals" on page 33.)

2. Press Copy from the Main screen.

3. Press the Image tab > Erase Edge.

4. Select the appropriate option.

•Off: Disables this feature.

•Border Erase: Erases equal amounts on all edges of the copies.

•Small Original Erase: Erases 0.25" (6mm) from the edge of the

copies. The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this

feature.

•Hole Punch Erase: Erases hole punch marks from the left edge of

the copies.

•Book Center and Edges Erase: Erases shadows of a binding or

book edge from the center and side edges of the copies. This feature

only applies when you do copying a book. (See "Book copying" on

page 46.)

5. Press OK.

6. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.

Erasing background images

This feature is helpful when copying originals containing color in the

background, as in newspapers or catalogs.

1. Load the originals, face up, in the DADF. Or place a single original face

down on the scanner glass.

2. Press Copy from the Main screen.

3. Press the Image tab > Erase Background.

4. Select the appropriate option.

•Off: Disables this feature.

•Auto: Optimizes the background.

•Enhance: The higher the number is, the more vivid the background

is.

•Erase: The higher the number is, the lighter the background is.

5. Press OK.

6. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.

Shifting margins

You can secure a room for binding by shifting the margin of a page.

This feature is possible only with A4, Letter, Legal, Folio, Oficio, JIS

B5, ISO B5, Executive, A5 and Statement sized paper.

Once you have set the Paper Supply option to Auto, you cannot use

this feature.

Before you start this special copy job, set the tray's Paper Types and

Paper Size to Transparency.(See "Setting the paper size and type" on

page 40.)

If you have set the Book Copy option to Off, you cannot use Book

Center and Edges Erase.

1. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original face

down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading originals" on page 33.)

2. Press Copy from the Main screen.

3. Press the Image tab > Margin Shift

4. Select Margin Shift option.

•Off: Disables this feature.

•Auto Center: Adjusts centers of the paper copy automatically. The

original must be loaded on the scanner glass to use this feature. This

option supports only the original is loaded on the scanner glass.

•Custom Margin: Adjusts the margin of the left and right, top and

bottom as you want using arrows. This option supports both on the

scanner glass or in DADF.

5. Press OK.

6. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.

Watermark copying

You can copy the original with a watermark. For example, you can use it

when you want to have large gray letters such as Top Secret or

Confidential printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of the

copy.

1. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original face

down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading originals and print media" on

page 33.)

2. Press Copy from the Main screen.

3. Select the tray in Paper Supply.

4. Press the Advanced tab > WaterMark.

5. Select WaterMark option.

•Off: Disables this feature.

•Top Secret: Prints the original with Top Secret text.

•Confidential: Prints the original with Confidential text.

•Urgent: Prints the original with Urgent text.

•Draft: Prints the original with Draft text.

•Custom: The machine prints the original with the customized

text.

6. Select 1st Page only, Size, Position, Darkness of options.

7. Press OK.

8. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.

Overlay copying

If you scan and store the data such as format, you can copy the

original with the previously stored data.

1. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original face

down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading originals and print media" on

page 33.)

2. Press Copy from the Main screen.

3. Select the tray in Paper Supply.

4. Press the Advanced tab > Overlay.

5. Press List.

6. Select a file name.

7. Select a overlay option.

•New: Makes the new overlay. When the file name pops up, enter the

file name.

•Detail: Shows information of the selected overlay.

•Edit: Modifies the name of the selected overlay.

•Delete: Deletes the selected overlay.

•Apply: Prints the originals with the selected overlay.

•Print: Prints the selected overlay.

•Cancel: Cancels overlay options you have selected.

8. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.

If you have selected option New in step 7, the machine starts storing the

new overlay by pressing the Start button.

Auto crop copying

The machine prints only the image of an original after cropping the blank

parts like the margin.

1. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original face

down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading originals and print media" on

page 33.)

2. Press Copy from the Main screen.

3. Select the tray in Paper Supply.

4. Press the Advanced tab > Auto Crop.

5. Press On to activate this feature.

6. Press OK.

7. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.

Multi-Bin

You can choose the output mode for printouts.

1. Press Copy from the Main screen.

2. Press the Advanced tab > Multi-Bin.

3. Select the appropriate option.

•Mailbox: Printouts are stacked in the bin you have set. If you set the

mailbox to Bin3, printouts will be stacked in Bin3.

•Job Separator: Printouts are stacked in the sequence of job order in

each bin. However, if there is a vacant bin left, the vacant bin has

priority, which means prinouts will be stacked there first.

•Collator: Printouts are stacked in sets to match the sequence of

originals in each bin.

•Stacker: Printouts are stacked in bins one-by-one. When Bin1 is full,

printouts will be stacked in Bin2.

4. Press OK.

You can only use this feature if you have installed optional 2-Bin

Finisher or 4-Bin Mailbox.

scanning

Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files that can be stored on your computer. Then you can fax

or email the files, upload them to your website, or use them to create projects that you can print.

This chapter gives you information about the scanning method and the different ways to send the scanned file to the destination.

This chapter includes

• Scanning basics

• Understanding the Scan screen

• Scanning originals and sending through email (Scan to Email)

• Using Scan and Fax Manager 2

• Scanning by a network connection

• Scanning originals and sending via SMB/FTP (Scan to Server)

• Changing the scan feature settings

SCANNING BASICS

Scanning with your machine lets you turn hard copy originals into digital

files.

There are two ways to scan originals, one is using the USB cable to directly

connect the machine with your computer, and the other is using the network

scan feature which scans and sends the document to a specific destination

via the network.

• Scan and Fax Manager 2: You just walk to the machine with the

originals and scan them from the control panel. Then, the scanned data

will be stored in the connected computers My Documents folder. When

you install all the softwares in the supplied CD, the Scan and Fax

Manager 2 is also automatically installed on your computer. This feature

can be used via the local connection or the network connection. (See

"Using Scan and Fax Manager 2" on page 53.)

•TWAIN:TWAIN is the one of preset imaging applications. Scanning an

image launches the selected application, enabling you to control the

scanning process. See Software section. This feature can be used via

the local connection or the network connection. See Software section.

• Samsung SmarThru Office: This feature is the accompanying

software for your machine. You can use this program to scan images or

documents, and this feature can be used via the local connection or the

network connection. See Software section.

•WIA:WIA stands for Windows Images Acquisition. To use this feature

your computer must be connected directly to the machine with a USB

cable. See Software section.

•Email:You can send the scanned image as an attachment to an email.

(See "Scanning originals and sending through email (Scan to Email)" on

page 51.)

•FTP:You can scan an image and upload it to an FTP server. (See

"Scanning originals and sending via SMB/FTP (Scan to Server)" on

page 56.)

•SMB:You can scan an image and send it to a shared folder on an SMB

server. (See "Scanning originals and sending via SMB/FTP (Scan to

Server)" on page 56.)

UNDERSTANDING THE SCAN SCREEN

To use the scanning feature, press Scan on the Main screen. If the screen

displays an other menu, press ( ) to go to the Main screen.

Press Scan to Email, Scan to PC or Scan to Server.

•Scan to Email: Scans and sends the scanned output to the

destination by email. (See "Scanning originals and sending through

email (Scan to Email)" on page 51.)

•Scan to PC: Scans and sends the scanned output to the destination

with the Scan and Fax Manager 2 program. (See "Using Scan and

Fax Manager 2" on page 53.

•Scan to Server: Scans and sends the scanned output to the

destination with SMB and FTP. (See "Scanning originals and

sending via SMB/FTP (Scan to Server)" on page 56.)

The maximum resolution that can be achieved depends upon various

factors, including computer speed, available disk space, memory, the

size of the image being scanned, and bit depth settings. Thus,

depending on your system and what you are scanning, you may not

be able to scan at certain resolutions, especially using enhanced

resolution.

If the message asking Auth. ID and Password, it means the network

administrator has set the authentication in SyncThru Web

Service.(See "Managing your machine from the website" on page 21.)

Basic tab

This section explains the Basic tab of Scan to Email and Scan to Server,

and Scan to PC's basic screen.

Scan to Email

•From: Sender's email address.

•To/Cc/Bcc: Recipients' addresses. Cc is for copies to an additional

recipient and Bcc is for the same as Cc but without their name be

displayed.

•Subject/Message: Subject and message of the email.

•Remove All: Erases everything in the input area.

•Address: Inputs the recipient's address just by pressing stored

addresses. You can store frequently used email addresses from your

computer using the SyncThru Web Service. (See "Storing email

addresses" on page 51.)

•Duplex: Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the

paper (1 Sided), both sides of the paper (2 Sided), or both sides of

paper but back is rotated 180 degrees (2 Sided, Rotate Side 2).

•Resolution: Selects the scanning resolution value.

•Back: Returns to the previous screen. If the network authentication

is enabled, the log off confirmation message popes up and closes

Scan to Email.

Scan to PC

If the authentication for network appears, you have to enter user name

and password to enter the Scan to PC screen.

•No.: Lists the number in order for application programs.

•Application: Shows the available application programs from your

computer.

•Select: Moves to the application program you have selected.

Scan to Server

•SMB: Sends the scanned file to SMB. Press SMB for that option.

•FTP: Sends the scanned file to FTP. Press FTP for that option.

•No.: Index number which you entered in SyncThru Web Service.

(See "Scanning originals and sending via SMB/FTP (Scan to

Server)" on page 56.)

•Server: Alias name which you entered in SyncThru Web Service.

(See "Scanning originals and sending via SMB/FTP (Scan to

Server)" on page 56.)

•Duplex: Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the

paper (1 Sided), both sides of the paper (2 Sided), or both sides of

paper but back is rotated 180 degrees (2 Sided, Rotate Side 2).

•Resolution: Selects the scanning resolution value.

•Back: Returns to the previous screen.

Advanced tab

•Original Size: Sets the originals to a specific fixed size. (See

"Original Size" on page 57.)

•Back: Returns to the previous screen.

Image tab

•Original Type: Selects whether the original is text or photo. (See

"Original Type" on page 57.)

•Color Mode: Adjusts the color options of the scan output. If the

original is color and you want to scan in color, press Color Mode.

(See "Color Mode" on page 57.)

•Darkness: Adjusts the degree of darkness of the scan output. Use

left/right arrow to adjust the values. (See "Darkness" on page 57.)

•Erase Background: Erases backgrounds like paper patterns. (See

"Erase Background" on page 57.)

•Scan to Edge: Scans originals from edge-to-edge. (See "Scan to

Edge" on page 58.)

•Back: Returns to the previous screen.

Output tab

•Quality: Adjusts the display quality of the scan output. (See

"Quality" on page 58.)

•File Format: Selects the file format of the scan output. (See "File

Format" on page 58.)

•Scan Preset: Automatically changes some scan options such as file

format, resolution, and more. You can adjust options to fit each

specific purpose. (See "Scan Preset" on page 58.)

•Back: Returns to the previous screen.

SCANNING ORIGINALS AND SENDING

THROUGH EMAIL (SCAN TO EMAIL)

You can scan the originals and email the scanned image to several

destinations from the machine by email.

Sending a scanned image to several destinations as

an email attachment

1. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner

glass for one sheet of paper.

2. Press Scan from the Main screen.

3. Press Scan to Email.

4. Set the scan features in the Advanced, Image, or Output tabs. (See

"Advanced tab" on page 50.)

5. Press the Basic tab to enter the email address.

•From: Sender's address. Touch From and then the keyboard pops

up on the screen. Use the pop up keyboard to enter your email

addresses. Or you can use Local and Global to enter the addresses

easily. (See "Global" on page 52.)

•To/Cc/Bcc: Recipient's email address manually with the pop up

keyboard, or by pressing Local or Global. Local or Global

addresses are pre-loaded address lists from your computer or the

LDAP server which is configured at Web UI. (See "Global" on

page 52.)

•Subject: Title of email.

•Message: Enters the text which will be as the contents of the email.

The maximum size is 1KB.

6. Set the scan quality by Duplex and Resolution.

•Duplex: Sets this option for originals that are printed on one side

only, or on both sides.

•Resolution: Sets the scanning resolution by pressing left/right

arrows.

7. Press the Start button to scan and send the file.

Storing email addresses

There are two kinds of email addresses - Local on your machine's memory

and Global on the LDAP server - which differ depending on where they are

stored. Local is that email addresses are stored in the machine's memory,

and Global is that email addresses are stored in the certain (LDAP) server.

Through the SyncThru Web Service, you can easily enter and store email

addresses from your computer.

Individual

1. Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.

2. Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.

3. Click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service.

If the authentication message shows, enter User Name and

Password. This message shows only when the network

administrator has set the authentication in SyncThru Web

Service. (See "Managing your machine from the website" on

page 21.)

To delete previously entered contents, press Remove All.

While the machine is sending an email, you cannot do the copy job

either sending a fax.

4. Click Machine Settings > E-mail Setup > Individual Address

Book. Then the screen shows Individual Address Book on the

right side of the screen.

5. Click Add.

6. When the Add E-Mail screen appears, select the Index number,

enter User Name and E-mail Address.

7. Click Apply.

8. Check if the emails are correctly stored and listed on your machine

by pressing Local > the Individual tab.

Group

1. Access to the SyncThru Web Service from your computer.

2. Make sure you have configured Individual Address Book.

3. Click Machine Settings > E-mail Setup > Group Address Book.

Then the screen shows Group Address Book on the right side.

4. Click Add.

5. Select the Group number and enter Group Name.

6. Select email addresses by clicking the check boxes.

7. Click Apply.

8. Check if the email addresses are correctly stored and listed on your

machine by pressing Group.

Global

Email addresses which are stored in Global in your machine are

processed by the LDAP server.

1. Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.

2. Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.

3. Click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service.

4. Click Machine Settings > LDAP Server Setup. Then the LDAP

Server screen shows on the right side.

5. Enter IP Address or Host Name or Host Name and LDAP server

and Port.

6. Enter optional information.

7. Click Apply.

Entering email addresses by the address book

Once you have stored the frequently used addresses into the address book,

you can simply enter email addresses.

1. Press Local or Global from the Basic tab of Scan to Email.

The search window shows.

2. Press the initial alphabet key of the address you are looking for. Or

press Search to specify the search criteria.

When the search is completed, the screen displays the search results.

3. Press From and enter your email address and press OK.

4. Select the address you want in the right-hand pane, and the press To,

Cc or Bcc in the left-hand pane.

5. Press Apply. Keep selecting addresses as many as you want.

6. Press OK.

Entering email addresses by the keyboard

When you press the input field in the From, To, Cc, or message input field,

the keyboard shows on the display screen.

The following explanation is the example that you are entering

"abcdefg@abc.com".

1. Press From in the Basic tab of the Scan to Email.

2. Press a, b, c, d, e, f, g.

3. Press @.

4. Press a, b, c.

5. Press . and press c, o, m.

6. Press OK after finishing all the contents.

The LDAP server administrator must store the email address data.

The method of storing is varies depending on the server and the

operating systems.

To enter contents in other fields, press on the

keyboard.

USING SCAN AND FAX MANAGER 2

If you have installed the printer driver, Scan and Fax Manager 2 program

has installed too. Start Scan and Fax Manager 2 program to find out about

this program information and the installed scan driver's condition. Through

this program, you can change scan settings and add or delete the folders

where scanned documents are saved in your computer.

1. From the

Start

menu, click Samsung Printers > Scan and Fax

Manager2.

2. Select the appropriate machine from the Scan and Fax Manager2

window.

3. Press Properties.

4. The Set Scan Button tab allows you to change the saving destination

and scan settings, add or delete application program, and format files.

5. When setting is done, press OK.

Set Scan Button tab

Scan Destination

•Available Destination List: Shows the list of applications currently

linked to scanned images in the PC’s registry. Select the program

you want to use and click the right arrow and add to Front Panel

Destination List.

•Front Panel Destination List: Shows the list of applications to open

scanned image.

•Add Application: Allows you to add application you want to use to

Available Destination List.

•Remove Application: Allows you to remove an item added by the

user in the Available Destination List.

•File Format: Allows you to select the form of scanned data to be

saved. You can choose among BMP, JPEG, PDF, and TIFF.

Scan Property

•Computer ID: Shows the ID of your computer.

•Save Location: Allows you to choose the location of the default

saving folder.

•Resolution: Allows you to choose the scan resolution.

•Scan Color: Allows you to choose the scan color.

•Scan Size: Allows you to choose the scan size.

•ADF Duplex: Automatically scans both sides. If your model does not

support this option, it will be grayed out.

•Default: Allows you to go back to default options.

Scan Assistant

When you press Quick Scan in Scan and Fax Manager 2, the Scan

Assistant window appears. Scan Assistant allows you to adjust scan

settings and start the scanning process.

In the Basic mode, Scan Settings and Preferences are available only. If

you want to use more settings, press Advanced.

•Favorites: Allows you to save the current preferences settings for

future use. When you save Favorites, all current scan settings are

saved. To use a saved setting, select it from the Favorites drop

down list. The machine is now set to scan according to the setting

you selected. To delete saved setting, select it from the Favorites

drop down list and click Delete. To set a favorite as startup, select

the favorite you want to set as startup, then click the Set as default

button.

•Scan Settings: The following scan options are available.

- Image Type : Allows you to chose the proper color settings for

image scanning.

- Resolution: Allows you to choose the image resolution.

- Document Size: Allows you to choose the proper size of the

scanned image.

- Document Source: Allows you to choose the device you want to

scan with.

- Prompt for additional pages: If this check box is checked, you

can scan pages continuously. This option is useful when you scan

multi-page documents and/or when Document Source is set to

Flatbed (scanner glass). In this case a sequence of scanned

images is processed as a single document.

- Pages to Scan: Allows you to specify how many pages are to be

scanned. This option is available when Document Source is set to

ADF Simplex, ADF Duplex-Short Edge, and ADF Duplex-Long

Edge.

•Preference: The following scan options are available.

- Auto crop image after preview: If this option is checked, the

scanning area will be automatically adjusted to the image size.

- Preview on program start: If this option is checked, the scanning

area will be selected automatically as shown in the preview.

- Blank page detection: This operation automatically detects

whether the scanned image is blank or not.

- Delete page: Blank pages will be deleted at the end of the

scanning process.

- Separate files: Blank page will work as a scan job separator. That

is, when multiple pages are scanned at once a blank page will

divide scanned image sequence into parts. Each part will be

treated as a separate document (group).

•Advanced: In the Advanced mode, additional options such as

Image Adjustment, Image Enhancement, and Additional

Settings are available.

The Scan and Fax Manager2 program can only be used in the

Window and Macintosh system. If you use the Macintosh, see

Software section.

You can open Scan and Fax Manager2 by right clicking the

Smart Panel icon in the Windows task bar and seleting Scan and

Fax Manager2.

Click the Help button from the lower-left corner of the window and click

on any option you want to know about. Then a pop up window appears

with information about that option's feature which is provided from the

Scan Assistant.

- Image Adjustment: Allows you to perform some transformations of

the scanned image. These transformations include automatic

adjustment of image size, straightening and rotation.

- Image Enhancement: Allows you to remove various defects of the

image and improve its quality.

- Additional settings: Allows special processing of scanned

images. These transformations include stitching several partial

image scans into a single image, processing of scanned books

and watermark stamping.

SCANNING BY A NETWORK CONNECTION

If you have connected your machine to a network and set up the network

parameters correctly, you can scan and send images over the network.

Preparing for network scanning

Before using your machine’s network scanning features, you need to

configure the following settings, depending on your scan destination:

• Register as an authorized user for scanning to email, FTP, or SMB

• Set up the SMTP server for scanning to email

• Set up the FTP servers for scanning to FTP

• Set up the SMB servers for scanning to SMB

User authentication for network scanning

To send an email, FTP, or SMB, you must register authorized local or

network users using SyncThru Web Service.

• If user authentication has been activated, only authorized local users

or on the DB server (SMB, LDAP, Kerberos) can send scanned data

to the network (email, FTP, SMB).

• For network scanning using the authentication feature, you must

SyncThru Web Service.

• User authentication has 3 options: none (Default), network

authentication, and local authentication.

Registering local authorized users

1. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click

Go to access the web site of your machine.

2. Click Machine Settings.

3. Select Local Authentication on the General Setup of the User

Authentication web page.

4. Click Add.

5. Select an index number corresponding to the location for storing the

entry, from 1 to 50.

6. Enter your name, auth ID, password, e-mail address and phone

number.

You need to enter the registered user ID and password in the

machine when you start scanning to email from the control panel.

7. Click Apply.

1. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click

Go to access the web site of your machine.

2. Click Machine Settings.

3. Select Network Authentication on the General Setup of User

Authentication web page.

4. Click Apply and OK.

5. Select the Authentication Type that you prefer.

6. Configure the values for each feature, as follows.

7. Click Apply.

Network user authenticated by Kerberos

1. Enter the realm used for Kerberos login.

2. Select IP Address or Host Name.

3. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.

4. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.

The default port number is 88.

5. You can add a backup domain as a previous step.

6. Click Apply.

Network user authorized by SMB

1. Enter the domain that is used for SMB login.

2. Select IP Address or Host Name.

3. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.

4. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.

The default port number is 139.

5. User can add a backup domain as in the previous step.

6. Click Apply.

Network authorized user by LDAP

1. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click

Go to access the web site of your machine.

2. Click Machine Settings and LDAP Server Setup.

3. Select IP Address or Host Name.

4. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.

5. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.

The default port number is 389.

6. Enter Search Root Directory, the top search level of the LDAP

directory tree.

7. Select Authentication method. Two options for LDAP server login.

Anonymous: This is used to bind with null password and login ID

(Password and login ID are grayed out in SWS).

Simple: This is used to bind with the login ID and password in SWS.

8. Check the box next to Append Root to Base DN.

9. Select Match User’s Login ID to the following LDAP attribute

(options are CN, UID, or UserPrincipalName).

10. Enter your login name, password, maximum number of search

results and search timeout.

11. Select Serach Name Order that you desire.

12. Check the box next to "From:" Field Security Options.

13. Click Apply.

Setting up an e-mail account

To scan and send an image as an email attachment, you need to set up

network parameters using SyncThru Web Service.

1. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click

Go to access the web site of your machine.

2. Click Machine Settings and E-mail Setup.

3. Select IP Address or Host Name.

User can add up to 6 alternate domains.

LDAP Referral: LDAP client will search referral server if the

LDAP server has no data to reply to query and if the LDAP server

has a referral server.

This option is only provided if you have selected the Network

authentication option in the user authentication setting. You may

check this option if you want to search for information in a default

email address group.

4. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.

5. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.

The default port number is 25.

6. Check the box next to SMTP Requires Authentication to require

authentication.

7. Enter the SMTP server login name and password.

8. Click Apply.

Setting up an FTP server

To use an FTP server, you need to set up parameters to access the FTP

servers using SyncThru Web Service.

1. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click

Go to access the web site of your machine.

2. Click Machine Settings and FTP Setup.

3. Click Server List.

4. Click Add.

5. Select the index number, from 1 to 20.

6. Enter a name in Alias for the Setup for the corresponding Server

List entry. This name will be displayed on your machine.

7. Select IP Address or Host Name.

8. Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name.

9. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.

The default port number is 21.

10. Check the box next to Anonymous if you want the FTP server to

permit access to unauthorized persons.

It is unchecked by default.

11. Enter the login name and password.

12. Enter the Scan File Folder under FTP directory for saving the

scanned image.

13. Click Apply.

Setting up an SMB server

To use an SMB server, you need to set up parameters for access to

SMB servers using SyncThru Web Service.

1. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click

Go to access the web site of your machine.

2. Click Machine Settings and SMB Setup.

3. Click Server List.

4. Click Add.

5. Select the index number, from 1 to 20.

6. Enter a name in Alias for the Setup for the corresponding Server

List entry. This name will be displayed on your machine.

7. Select IP Address or Host Name.

8. Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name.

9. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.

The default port number is 139.

10. Enter the Share name of the server.

11. Check the box next to Anonymous if you want to permit

unauthorized persons to access the SMB server.

This box is unchecked by default.

12. Enter the login name and password.

13. Enter the domain name of the SMB server.

14. Enter the Scan File Folder under shared folder for storing the

scanned image.

15. Click Apply.

If the authentication method of SMTP server is

POP3beforeSMTP, check the box next to SMTP Requires POP3

Before SMTP Authentication.

a. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host

name.

b. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535. The default

port number is 25.

SCANNING ORIGINALS AND SENDING VIA SMB/

FTP (SCAN TO SERVER)

You can scan an image and send it to a total of 5 destinations via the SMB

or FTP.

Preparation for scanning to SMB/FTP

Select the folder and share it with the machine in order to receive the

scanned file.

1. Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.

2. Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.

3. Click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service.

4. Click Machine Settings > SMB Setup > Server List. The Server List is

then displayed on the right side of the screen.

5. Click Add.

6. Select the index number from 1 to 20.

7. Enter a name in Alias for the Setup for the corresponding Server List

entry. This name will be displayed on your machine.

8. Select IP Address or Host Name.

9. Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name.

10. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.

The default port number is 139.

11. Enter the share name of the server.

12. Put a check mark next to in Anonymous if you want to allow the SMB

server to be accessed by unauthorized persons.

By default, this is unchecked.

13. Enter the login name and password.

14. Enter the domain name of the SMB server.

15. Enter the location for storing the scanned image. This is the location you

entered in step 7..

16. Click Apply.

Scanning and sending to SMB/FTP server

1. Press Scan from the Main screen.

2. Press Scan to Server.

3. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can place a single

original document face down on the scanner glass.

4. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab.

5. Select Duplex and Resolution in the Basic tab.

6. Press Scan to Server to show the SMB server list you entered in the

SyncThru Web Service.

7. Select the destination SMB server.

8. Press Start on the control panel.

The machine begins scanning and then sends the scanned image to the

specified server.

CHANGING THE SCAN FEATURE SETTINGS

This part explains how to adjust the document settings for each scan job,

such as resolution, duplex, original size, type, color mode, darkness, and

more. The options you change will be maintained for a certain time, but after

that period, the options will be reset to default values.

Duplex

This feature especially applies when the original documents to be scanned

are two-sided. You can select whether the machine scans only one side of

the paper or both sides of the paper.

Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Basic tab >

Duplex. Use left/right arrows to toggle the values.

•1 Sided: For originals that are printed on one side only.

•2 Sided: For originals that are printed on both sides.

•2 Sided, Rotate Side 2: For originals that are printed on both sides.

But the back is rotated 180 degrees.

Resolution

You can adjust document resolution.

Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Basic tab >

Resolution. Use left/right arrows to toggle the values. The higher value you

select the clear result you get. But the scanning time may take longer.

100, 200, 300 dpi resolution is available only when Color Mode is set to

Color or Gray. The following table shows detailed information feature,

resolution and file format options.

The next steps are for SMB server setting using SyncThru Web

Service, and the setting for FTP server is the same as SMB. Apply the

same steps for setting up the FTP server.

If the authentication message shows, enter User Name and Password.

This message shows only when the network administrator has set the

authentication in SyncThru Web Service. (See "Managing your

machine from the website" on page 21.)

You can select up to five destinations using both of SMB or FTP

servers.

To use 2 Sided and 2 Sided, Rotate Side 2, you have to load the

originals on the DADF. Because, if the machine can not detect the

original on DADF, automatically changes the option to 1 Sided.

Original Size

You can specify the scanning area on the originals by selecting the pre-

defined size, or putting in the margin value or

Auto

. If you set this option to

Auto

, the machine senses and determines the size of the original.

Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Advanced tab >

Original Size. Use up/down arrows to go to the next screen. Select the

appropriate option and press OK.

Original Type

You can set the original document type in order to enhance the quality of a

document being scanned.

Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Image tab >

Original Type. Select the appropriate option and press OK.

•Text: For originals that have text or line art.

•Text/Photo: For originals that have both text and photographs

together.

•Photo: For originals that are continuous tone photographs.

Color Mode

Use this option to scan the original in

Mono

, Gray or

Color

mode.

Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Image tab >

Color

Mode

. Select the appropriate option and press OK.

•

Color

: Uses color to display an image. 24 bits per pixel, 8 bits for

each RGB, is used for 1 pixel.

•Gray: Uses the black gradation to display an image. 8 bits per pixel.

•

Mono

: Displays an image in black and white. 1 bit per pixel.

Darkness

You can select the degree of darkness of the scanned output. If your

original document is light or faded, press the right arrow to make the output

darker.

Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Image tab >

Darkness. Press right arrow to enhance the darkness degree then, press

OK.

Erase Background

You can lighten, reduce or deletes the dark background from scanning

colored paper or newspaper originals.

Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Image tab >

Erase

Background

. Select the appropriate option and press OK.

•Off: Disables this feature.

•Auto: Optimizes the background.

•Enhance: The higher the number is, the more vivid the background

is.

•Erase: The higher the number is, the lighter the background is.

FEATURE RESOLUTION (DPI) FILE FORMAT

Scan to Email 100, 200, 300, 400,

600

PDF, Single-Page TIFF,

Multi-Page TIFF, JPEG

Scan to PC 100, 200, 300, 400,

600

PDF, TIFF, JPEG

Scan to Server 100, 200, 300, 400,

600

PDF, Single-Page TIFF,

Multi-Page TIFF, JPEG

The file format JPEG cannot be selected if Mono has been selected

for Color Mode.

Scan to Edge

You can set the machine to scan full size of a page as it is. Usually, the

machine scans a page except edges, which means the margin, especially

when you do the copy job with certain sized paper in the tray. But if you

scan and sent it right away via the network, as the file, the machine does not

need to exclude the edges from the originals.

Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Image tab > Scan

to Edge. Select

and press OK.

Quality

You can use this option to produce a high quality document. Higher quality

you select a larger file size you get.

Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Output tab >

Quality.

File Format

You can select the file format before you proceed with the scanning job.

Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Output tab > File

Format.

•PDF: Scans originals in PDF format.

•Single-Page TIFF: Scans originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File

Format), but several originals are scanned as one file.

•Multi-Page TIFF: Scans the originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File

Format), and several originals are scanned as several file.

•JPEG: Scans original in JPEG format.

Scan Preset

This feature allows you to use optimized settings for your specific scan job.

Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Output tab > Scan

Preset.

•Sharing and Printing: Produces a small-sized file for normal quality

documents.

•High Quality Printing: Set this option for high quality output with the

largest file size.

•Archival Record: For the electronic file which is of the smallest file

size of the output.

•OCR: Produces scanned output for OCR software. You can expect

the highest quality images.

•Simple Scan: Used for a simple document with text only. The file

size of output is small.

•Custom: Applies the current scan settings that you have chosen.

When you set Color Mode to Mono, the Quality option is grayed out.

The file format JPEG cannot be selected if Mono has been selected

for Color Mode.

basic printing

This chapter explains common printing tasks.

This chapter includes:

• Printing a document • Canceling a print job

PRINTING A DOCUMENT

Your machine allows you to print from various Windows, Macintosh, or

Linux applications. The exact steps for printing a document may vary

depending on the application you use.

For details about printing, see Software section.

CANCELING A PRINT JOB

If the print job is waiting in a print queue or print spooler, such as the printer

group in Windows, delete the job as follows:

1. Click the Windows Start menu.

2. For Windows 2000, select Settings and then Printers.

For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.

For Windows Vista/2008, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound

> Printers.

For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >

Devices and Printers.

For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >

Devices and Printers.

3. For Windows 2000, XP, 2003, 2008 and Vista, double-click your

machine.

For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, right click your printer

icon > context menus > See what’ s printing.

4. From the Document menu, select Cancel.

You can also cancel the current job by pressing Stop on the control panel.

You can also access this window by simply double-clicking the printer

icon at the bottom right corner of the Windows desktop.

faxing (optional)

This chapter gives you information about using your machine as a fax machine.

This chapter includes:

• Preparing to fax

• Understanding the Fax screen

• Sending a fax

• Receiving a fax

• Adjusting the document settings

• Setting up a fax phonebook

• Using the polling option

• Using Mailbox

• Printing a report after sending a fax

• Sending a fax in toll save time

• Adding documents to a reserved delay fax job

• Forwarding a received fax to other destination

PREPARING TO FAX

Before you send or receive a fax, you need to connect the supplied line cord

to the wall jack. Refer to the Quick Install Guide how to make a connection.

The method of making a telephone connection is varies from one country to

another.

UNDERSTANDING THE FAX SCREEN

To use the fax feature, press Fax on the Main screen. If the screen displays

an other menu, press ( ) to go to the Main screen.

Basic tab

•Fax number input area: Shows the recipient's fax number using the

number keypad on the control panel. If you configured the phone

book, press Individual or Group. (See "Setting up a fax

phonebook" on page 64.)

•Add No.: Lets you add more destinations.

•: Deletes the last digit entered.

•: Removes all digits of the selected entry.

•Remove: Removes the selected fax number entry.

•Remove All: Removes all the fax numbers in the input area.

•Address: Picks up the frequently used fax numbers directly from

your machine or from SyncThru Web Service. (See "Setting up a

fax phonebook using SyncThru Web Service" on page 65.)

•

You cannot use this machine as a fax via the internet phone. For

more information ask the internet service provider.

• You may experience restrictions on color fax transmmission, slower

fax transmmission, poor fax quality and communication failures when

faxing over VoIP network. Contact you local network administrator or

Internet Service Provider for more details.

• To use advanced features of the fax, press Machine Setup on the

control panel and

Admin Setting

> Setup > Fax Setup. (See "Fax

Setup" on page 78.)

• We recommend you to use traditional analog phone services

(PSTN: public switched telephone network) when connecting

telephone lines to use Fax. If you use other Internet services (DSL,

ISDN, VolP), you can improve the connection quality by using the

Micro-filter. The Micro-filter eliminates unnecessary noise signals

and improves connection quality or Internet quality. Since the DSL

Micro-filter is not provided with the machine, contact your Internet

Service provider for use on DSL Micro-filter.

1Line port

2Micro filter

3DSL modem/Telephone line

If you want to add fax feature to the machine, check the option lists

(See "Fax option kit" on page 110.) and contact the purchasing point

to order. When you purchase a fax kit, install the kit by following the

steps described in the Fax Kit Setup Guide which is enclosed in the kit.

After installing the fax kit, set the machine to use this feature. (See

"Enabling Fax feature after installing the fax option kit" on page 114.)

If the optional fax feature is not installed the fax icon will not appear on

the Main screen.

•Duplex: Selects whether the machine send faxes one side of the

original, both sides of the original.

•Resolution: Adjusts the resolution options.

Advanced tab

•Original Size: Selects the size of the original document. Press OK to

update current setting.

•Delay Send: Sets the machine to send a fax at a later time without

your intervention. (See "Delaying a fax transmission" on page 62.)

•Priority Send: Sends an urgent fax before reserved operations.

(See "Sending a priority fax" on page 63.)

•Polling: Used when the receiver requests the document to be faxed

remotely at sender's absence or vice versa. In order to use the

polling function, the originals must be previously stored in the

machine. (See "Using the polling option" on page 65.)

•Mailbox: Used to store a received fax or originals in the machine

memory which are ready to be polled. You can use a mailbox on the

same machine you are using, or the one on a remote machine. Each

mailbox has a corresponding mailbox number, name and password.

(See "Using Mailbox" on page 66.)

•Back: Returns to the Basic tab.

Image tab

•Original Type: Enhances the fax quality based on the type of the

original document being scanned. (See "Original Type" on page 64.)

•Darkness: Adjusts the level of lightness or darkness of the fax. (See

"Darkness" on page 64.)

•Erase Background: Reduces dark backgrounds or paper patterns

as in newspaper originals. (See "Erase Background" on page 64.)

•Color Mode: Selects whether the user sends the fax in mono or

color. (See "Color Mode" on page 64.)

•Back: Returns to the Basic tab.

SENDING A FAX

This part explains how to send a fax, and the special methods of

transmission.

Setting the fax header

In some countries, you are required by law to indicate your fax number on

any fax you send.

1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter

password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on

page 30.)

3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Machine ID & Fax No.

4. Touch the input area to enter the machine name and your fax number.

5. Press OK.

Sending a fax

1. Press Fax from the Main screen.

2. Place the originals face up in the DADF.

3. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab.

4. Select Duplex and Resolution options in the Basic tab.

5. When the cursor is blinking in the input line, enter the fax number using

the number keypad on the control panel. Or use Address on the right

side of the screen, if you have stored frequently used fax numbers.

6. To add a number, press Add No..

When you place the originals, you can use either the DADF or the

scanner glass. (See "Loading originals" on page 33.) If the originals

are placed on both the DADF and the scanner glass, the machine will

read the originals on the DADF first, which has higher priority in

scanning.

If the originals are printed on both sides of the paper, select 2

Sided with left/right arrows in the Duplex feature.

7. Press Start on the control panel. The machine starts to scan and send a

fax to destinations.

Sending a fax manually (On Hook Dial)

1. Press Fax from the Main screen.

2. Place the originals face up into the DADF.

3. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab.

4. Select Duplex and Resolution options in the Basic tab.

5. Press On Hook Dial on the control panel.

6. Enter a fax number using the number keypad on the control panel.

• If the number is which you have dialed recently, press the Redial/

Pause button on the control panel to show ten recent fax numbers

and select a fax number.

7. Press Start when you hear a high-pitched fax signal from the remote fax

machine.

Automatic resending

When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer, the

machine automatically redials the number.

To change the time interval between redials and/or the number of redial

attempts, refer to the next following steps.

1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

2. Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter

password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on

page 30.)

3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.

4. Press Redial.

5. Select Redial Term and Redial Times.

6. Press OK.

Redialing the last number

1. Press Fax from the Main screen.

2. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab.

3. Place the originals face up into the DADF.

4. Press the Redial/Pause button on the control panel to show ten recent

fax numbers.

5. Select a fax number in the list and press OK.

The machine automatically begins to send.

Delaying a fax transmission

You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time when you will not be

present.

1. Press Fax from the Main screen.

2. Place the originals face up in the DADF.

3. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.

4. Press the Advanced tab > Delay Send.

5. Press On.

6. Enter Job Name using the keyboard on the display, select Start Time

with left/right arrows.

• If you do not enter Job Name, the machine assigns the job name as

'Fax Send Job xxx'. 'xxx' number are set in order.

7. Press OK to start storing the scanned original data into memory.

• When you want to cancel a fax job, press Stop before the machine

start transmission. Or press the Job Status button, and select the

job you want to delete, press Delete.

• If you used the scanner glass, the machine shows the message

asking to place another page.

• While the machine is sending a fax, you can not send an email at

the same time. (See "Scanning originals and sending through

email (Scan to Email)" on page 51.)

Color faxes are only supported when faxes are sent manually. (See

"Color Mode" on page 64.)

Start Time is the specific time you want the fax to be sent. You can set

Start Time on a 24 hour basis and 15 minutes later than the current

time. For example, if it is 1:00, then you can set the time starting from

1:15. If the set time is incorrect, the warning message will appear and

the machine resets it to the current time.

To cancel delaying a fax, press Off before sending is activated.

Sending a priority fax

This function is used when a high priority fax need to be sent ahead of

reserved operations. The original is scanned into memory and immediately

transmitted when the current operation is finished. In addition, priority

transmission will interrupt a sending to multiple destinations between

stations (example, when the transmission to station A ends, before

transmission to station B begins) or between redial attempts.

1. Press Fax from the Main screen.

2. Place the originals face up in the DADF.

3. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.

4. Press the Advanced tab > Priority Send.

5. Press On.

6. Press OK.

7. Press Start to start the urgent fax job.

RECEIVING A FAX

This section explains how to receive a fax, and the special receiving

methods available.

Changing the receive modes

Your machine is preset to Fax mode at the factory. When you receive a fax,

the machine answers the call on a specified number of rings and

automatically receives the fax. But if you want to change the Fax mode to

another mode, refer to next steps.

1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

2. Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter

password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on

page 30.)

3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Fax Initial Setup > Receive Mode.

4. Select the option.

•Telephone: Receives a fax by pressing On Hook Dial and then

Start.

•Fax: Answers an incoming fax call and immediately goes into the fax

reception mode.

•Answering Machine/Fax: Is for when an answering machine

attached to your machine. Your machine answers an incoming call,

and the caller can leave a message on the answering machine. If the

fax machine senses a fax tone on the line, the machine automatically

switches to Fax mode to receive the fax.

5. Press OK.

Receiving manually in Telephone mode

You can receive a fax call by pressing On Hook Dial and then pressing

Start when you hear a fax tone from the remote machine. The machine

begins receiving a fax.

Receiving automatically in Answering Machine/Fax

mode

To use this mode, you must attache an answering machine to the EXT

socket on the back of your machine. (See "Rear view" on page 18.)

If the caller leaves a message, the answering machine stores the message

as it would normally. If your machine detects a fax tone on the line, it

automatically starts to receive the fax.

Receiving faxes manually using an extension

telephone

This feature works best when you are using an extension telephone

connected to the EXT socket on the back of your machine. You can receive

a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension telephone, without

going to the fax machine.

When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax tones, press

the keys 9 on the extension phone. The machine receives the fax.

Press the buttons slowly in sequence. If you still hear the fax tone from the

remote machine, try pressing 9 once again.

To change the 9 to, for example, 3, follow the next steps.

1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

2. Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter

password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on

page 30.)

3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Receive Start Code.

4. Select On.

5. Press left/right arrows to display number 9.

6. Press OK.

Receiving in secure receiving mode

You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by

unauthorized people. You can turn on secure receiving mode to restrict

printing of received faxes when the machine is unattended. In secure

receiving mode, all incoming faxes go into memory.

1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

2. Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter

password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on

page 30.)

3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Secure Receive.

4. Select On.

5. Enter passcode with 4 digit number using the number keypad on the

control panel.

When the memory is full, the machine can no longer receive any

incoming fax. Secure free memory to resume by removing data stored

in the memory.

• If you have set your machine to this mode and your answering

machine is switched off, or no answering machine is connected to

EXT socket, your machine automatically goes into Fax mode after

a predefined number of rings.

• If your answering machine has a user-selectable ring counter, set

the machine to answer incoming calls within 1 ring.

• If you are in Telephone mode when the answering machine is

connected to your machine, you must switch off the answering

machine, or the outgoing message from the answering machine

will interrupt your phone conversation.

• While the machine is receiving a fax, you can not do the copy job.

To deactivate the Secure Receive feature, press Off. In this case, the

received fax will be printed out.

Receiving faxes in memory

Since your machine is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while you

are making copies or printing. If you receive a fax while you are copying or

printing, your machine stores incoming faxes in its memory. Then, as soon

as you finish copying or printing, the machine automatically prints the fax.

ADJUSTING THE DOCUMENT SETTINGS

Before sending a fax, you can adjust the document settings, such as

resolution, darkness, color, duplex and so forth. Refer to explanation of this

section.

Duplex

This function is especially intended for two-sided originals. You can select

whether the machine sends the fax on one side or both sides of the paper.

Load the originals onto the DADF to use this function.

Press Fax > the Basic tab > Duplex. Use left/right arrows to toggle the

value.

•1 Sided: Is for the originals that are printed on one side only.

•2 Sided: Is for the originals that are printed on both sides.

Resolution

Changing the resolution setting affects the appearance of the received

document.

Press Fax > the Basic tab > Resolution. Use left/right arrows to toggle the

values.

•Standard: Usually recommended for originals with text. This option

will reduce the transmission time.

•Fine: Recommended for the originals containing with small

characters, thin lines, or text that was printed using a dot-matrix

printer.

•Super Fine: Recommended for originals containing with extremely

fine detail, this option is enabled only if the receiving machine also

supports a Super Fine resolution.

Original Type

You can set the original document type to enhance the quality of a

document being scanned.

Press Fax > the Image tab > Original Type. Select the appropriate option

on the screen and press OK.

•Text: For originals with text or line art.

•Text/Photo: For originals with both text and photographs together.

•Photo: For originals that are continuous tone photographs.

Darkness

You can select the degree of darkness of the original document.

Press Fax > the Image tab > Darkness. Press the right arrow to enhance

the darkness degree and press OK.

Erase Background

You can lighten, reduce or delete the dark backgrounds from scanned

colored paper or newspaper originals.

Press Fax > the Image tab > Erase Background. Select the appropriate

option and press OK.

•Off: Disables this feature.

•Auto: Optimizes the background.

•Enhance: The higher the number is, the more vivid the background

is.

•Erase: The higher the number is, the lighter the background is.

Color Mode

You can transmit a fax in color using this feature. But this feature only

applies when you send a fax using On Hook Dial on the control panel.

Press Fax > the Image tab > Color Mode. Select option and OK.

•Mono: Transmits a fax in black and white.

•Color: Transmits a fax in color.

SETTING UP A FAX PHONEBOOK

Use this feature to store destination names, fax numbers and transmission

settings in your machine. There are two options, Individual and Group.

•Individual: Stores up to 200 fax numbers. And the fax numbers which

are stored in Individual work as Speed Dial No..

•Group: Makes groups when you frequently send the same document to

several destinations. You can store up to 100 group dial numbers.

Entries stored here will be available for selection within the sending list

on the Basic tab of Fax. Dialing Group can be also setup comprising of

many Individual entries.

The fax numbers, which are stored in Individual, work as Speed Dial No..

The document setting herein is for only current job. If you want to

change the default setting on document settings, refer to Admin

Setting > General tab >

Default Settings

. (See "General settings" on

page 76.)

For memory transmission, Super Fine mode is not available. The

resolution setting is automatically changed to Fine.

Erase Background is disabled if the Original Type is set to Photo.

Color Mode faxes are only supported when faxes are sent manually.

(See "Sending a fax manually (On Hook Dial)" on page 62.)

Storing individual fax numbers (Speed Dial No.)

1. Press Fax > the Basic tab > Individual.

•

Edit

: Changes the ID, Speed Dial No., and Fax No..

•

New

: Creates the new Speed Dial No..

•

Delete

: Deletes the selected Speed Dial No..

•Search: Searches the fax number which currently stored in

Individual phonebook. When the keyboard pops up, enter ID.

•

Detail

: Shows ID, Fax No. and Included group information if it is

grouped. (See "Storing individual fax numbers (Speed Dial No.)" on

page 65.)

•

Apply

: Inputs the selected fax number to the sending fax number list

in the Basic tab.

•

Cancel

: Cancels the current job and goes to the previous screen.

2. Press New.

3. Enter the name of the fax number in the ID field with the pop up

keyboard, and the fax number in the Fax No. area using the number

keypad on the control panel.

•ID: Enters the name.

•Speed Dial No.: Is automatically filled with the first free number. If

you want to assign to a different number, use left/right arrows.

•Fax No.: Enters a fax numbers, only the numbers, with the area

code if necessary.

4. Press OK.

Storing Group fax numbers (Group No.)

1. Press Fax > the Basic tab > Group.

2. Press New.

3. Press the input area in Group Dial ID, then the keyboard pops up, enter

the name.

4. Select Group Dial No. with left/right arrows.

•Group Dial ID: Enters the group name.

•Group Dial No.: Is automatically filled with the first free number. If

you want to assign to a different number, use left/right arrows.

5. Press OK.

6. Select an entry from Speed Dial List, and press Add. Repeat this step

until you added entries you need.

Make sure the selected Speed Dial List is copied to the left pane,

Group list.

7. Press OK to save the numbers.

Setting up a fax phonebook using SyncThru Web

Service

You can store fax numbers conveniently from the networked computer

using SyncThru Web Service.

1. Open the web browser in your computer.

2. Enter IP address of your machine, then SyncThru Web Service shows.

(Example. http://123.123.123.123)

3. Press

Machine Settings

> Fax Setup > Fax Phone Book.

4. Select Speed Dial (Individual).

5. Press Add.

6. Enter Index, Name and Phone Number. Index you enter here will be

the Speed Dial No. in the display screen of your machine.

7. Press Apply.

USING THE POLLING OPTION

Polling is used when one fax machine requests another to send a

document. This is useful when the person with the original document is not

in the office. The person who wants to receive the document, calls the

machine holding where the original is stored and requests that the

document be sent. In other words, it "polls" the machine holding that has the

original.

The polling process is as follows:

1. Sender stores the originals in the machine. (See "Storing the originals

for polling" on page 66.)

2. Sender gives the Passcode to the receiver.

3. Receiver dials the fax number and enters the Passcode when

requested. (See "Polling a remote fax" on page 66.)

Fax numbers are already stored in Speed Dial (Individual) can be

used when selecting.

Speed Dial numbers can be imported from an *.csv file.

To use this feature, both the sender and receiver must have the polling

feature.

4. Receiver presses Start to receive the stored fax.

Storing the originals for polling

1. Press Fax from the Main screen.

2. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner

glass with a single original document, face down.

3. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.

4. Press the Advanced tab > Polling > Store.

5. Press the input area then the pop up keyboard, enter Passcode (The

four-digit number which you have to inform the receiver). If you do not

want to set Passcode, enter number 0000 here. Then you can store,

delete, print and receive a fax for polling without any passcode.

6. Select the Delete On Poll option. If you select Off, the sent fax data will

be remained in the machine’s memory even after it’s printing. If you

select On, the fax data will be deleted at the printing point.

7. Press OK to start to store the originals into memory for polling.

8. Give the Passcode to the receiver.

Printing (Deleting) the polling document

1. Press Fax from the Main screen.

2. Press the Advanced tab > Polling > Print (or Delete).

3. Enter Passcode

4. Press OK.

Polling a remote fax

This option allows you to retrieve (poll) a fax which is stored in the remote

machine.

1. Press Fax from the Main screen.

2. Press the Advanced tab > Polling > Poll from Remote.

3. Enter Passcode and Destination Fax No using the number keypad on

the control panel. You have to be informed Passcode from sender with

the remote fax machine.

4. Press OK.

Polling from a remote Mailbox

This option allows you to retrieve (poll) a fax which is stored in the Mailbox

of on the remote machine. Before you start polling, you must be informed of

Mailbox No. and Passcode from the sender. (See "Using Mailbox" on

page 66.)

1. Press Fax from the Main screen.

2. Press the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Poll from Remote.

3. Enter Remote Fax No, Mailbox No., and Passcode. All these field are

filled with information from the sender.

4. Press OK.

USING MAILBOX

You can store the original data in Mailbox, since you are absent and the

receiver need to be retrieve a fax from you. This feature allows you to

program up to 15 individual Mailbox. Before you store the originals, the

Mailbox must be created.

Creating Mailbox

1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

2. Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter the

password and press OK.

3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.

If you want to use the Mailbox, refer to Storing the originals in the

Mailbox. (See "Storing originals in Mailbox" on page 67.)

Your can use Delay Poll From Remote to poll the fax at a specific

time within 24 hours.

You can use Delay Poll From Remote to poll a fax from the

remote machine's Mailbox at certain time within 24 hours.

4. Press the down arrow to scroll down, if necessary.

5. Press Mailbox Setup.

6. Press Mailbox Configuration. Then the screen displays Mailbox List.

7. Select a Mailbox on the Mailbox List.

8. Press Edit Mailbox.

9. Press Mailbox ID and enter ID with number keypad on the control panel.

Up to 20 numbers you can enter.

10. Enter Mailbox Name with the pop up keyboard. It can be either alphabet

or number up to 20 digits.

11. Enter Mailbox Passcode with the numeric keypad on the control panel.

12. Set Notification option to On, if you want to be notified when a fax is

received into Mailbox.

13. Press OK.

Storing originals in Mailbox

Since you created the mailbox, you can store originals in it.

1. Press Fax from the Main screen.

2. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner

glass with a single original document faced down.

3. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.

4. Press the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Store.

5. Enter Mailbox No. and Passcode which are set from Creating Mailbox

in page 66.

6. Press OK.

Faxing to a remote Mailbox

To fax and store the originals in a recipient's Mailbox in this machine, you

can use the Send to Remote feature.

1. Press Fax from the Main screen.

2. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner

glass with a single original document face down.

3. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.

4. Press the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Send to Remote.

If you set Mailbox Passcode to number 0000, then the machine

does not ask passcode for using Mailbox, such as storing,

deleting, printing, receiving.

• Deleting the data in a specific Mailbox

Press Fax > the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Delete, enter

Mailbox No. and Passcode, and then press OK. When the

confirmation window appears, press Yes to complete the job.

• Printing a Mailbox

Press Fax > the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Print, enter

Mailbox No. and Passcode, and press OK.

5. Enter Remote Fax No, Mailbox No., and Passcode. All these field are

filled with information from the receiver.

6. Press OK.

PRINTING A REPORT AFTER SENDING A FAX

You can set the machine to print a report whether a fax transmission is

successfully completed or not.

1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter

password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on

page 30.)

3. Press the Print/Report tab > Report > Fax Report > Fax Send Report.

4. Press On.

5. Press OK.

SENDING A FAX IN TOLL SAVE TIME

You can set the machine to send a fax in toll save time to save a telephone

fee. If you send a fax after setting this feature, fax data will be stored in

machine's memory and the machine will start to send fax in toll save time.

1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter

password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on

page 30.)

3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.

4. Press down arrow on the right side.

5. Press Toll Save.

6. Press On.

7. Press Start Time and set the start date and time with left/right arrows.

8. Press OK.

9. Press End Time and set the end date and time with left/right arrows.

10. Press OK.

11. Press OK.

ADDING DOCUMENTS TO A RESERVED DELAY

FAX JOB

You can add additional documents to the delayed fax job which is saved in

memory.

1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter

password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on

page 30.)

3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.

4. Press down arrow on the right side.

5. Press Send Batch.

6. Press On.

7. Press OK.

• When you send a fax, if a fax number is same as the number in delay

fax, the machine asks whether you want to add more documents to

reserved delay fax.

FORWARDING A RECEIVED FAX TO OTHER

DESTINATION

You can set the machine to forward the received or sent fax to other

destination by a fax or an email. If you are out of office but have to receive

the fax, this feature may be useful.

Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by a fax

You can set the machine to forward every fax you sent to other destination

by faxing.

1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter

password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on

page 30.)

3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.

The detailed information is available in advanced setup part. (See

"Printing a report" on page 82.)

• When you forward a fax by an email, you firstly set the mail server

and IP address in SyncThru Web Service.

•If this Fax Forward Settings feature to On, you cannot use a fax

with the On Hook Dial button on the control panel.

4. Press down arrow on the right side.

5. Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Fax Setting > Send

Forward.

6. Press On and enter a fax number using the keypad on the control panel.

7. Press OK.

Forwarding a received fax to other destination by a

fax

With this feature, you can forward every fax you received to other

destination by faxing. When the machine receives a fax, a fax is stored in

the memory then, the machine sends it to the destination you have set.

1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter

password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on

page 30.)

3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.

4. Press down arrow on the right side.

5. Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Fax Setting > Receive

Forward.

6. Press Forward and enter a fax number using the keypad on the control

panel.

• If you want to set the star time and end time, select Start Time and

End Time.

• If you want the machine to print the report after forwarding a fax, set

the Forward & Print.

7. Press OK.

Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by an

1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter

password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on

page 30.)

3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.

4. Press down arrow on the right side.

5. Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Email Setting > Send

Forward.

6. Press On.

7. Enter the From and Destination Email option using the keyboard on

the display.

8. Press OK.

Forwarding a received fax to other destination by an

1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter

password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on

page 30.)

3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.

4. Press down arrow on the right side.

5. Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Email Setting > Receive

Forward.

6. Press Forward and enter the From and Destination Email option using

the keyboard on the display.

• If you want the machine to print the report after forwarding a fax, set

the Forward & Print.

7. Press OK.

Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by server

1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter

password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on

page 30.)

3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.

4. Press down arrow on the right side.

5. Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Server Setting > Send

Forward.

6. Press On.

7. Press OK.

Forwarding a received fax to other destination by

server

1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter

password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on

page 30.)

3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.

4. Press down arrow on the right side.

5. Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Server Setting > Receive

Forward.

6. Press On.

7. Press OK.

SETTING UP THE END FAX TONE

The end fax tone that sounds to indicate that the fax has been received can

be turned on or off.

1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter

password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on

page 30.)

3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.

4. Press down arrow on the right side.

5. Press Fax Ending Sound.

6. Press On.

7. Press OK.

If Forward to Server Setting is on, this option will be grayed out.

If Forward to Email Setting is on, this option will be grayed out. The

server setting must be done in SyncThru Web Service prior to this

option on.

If Forward to Email Setting is on, this option will be grayed out. The

server setting must be done in SyncThru Web Service prior to this

option on.

using USB memory device

This chapter explains how to use a USB memory device with your machine.

This chapter includes:

• About USB memory

• Understanding the USB screen

• Plugging in a USB memory device

• Scanning to an USB memory device

• Scan to USB

• Changing the scan feature settings

• Printing from a USB memory device

ABOUT USB MEMORY

USB memory devices are available with a variety of memory capacities to

give you more room for storing documents, presentations, downloaded

music and videos, high resolution photographs, or whatever other files you

want to store or move.

You can do the following on your machine using a USB memory device:

• Scan documents and save them on a USB memory device.

• Print data stored on a USB memory device.

• Format the USB memory device.

UNDERSTANDING THE USB SCREEN

To use the USB feature, press USB on the Main screen. If the screen

displays an other menu, press ( ) to go to the Main screen.

Press USB Format, USB Print or Scan to USB.

•USB Format: You can delete image files stored on an USB memory

device one by one or all at once by reformatting the device.

•USB Print: You can directly print files stored on an USB memory

device. You can print TIFF, BMP, JPEG, PDF, and PRN files. (See

"Printing from a USB memory device" on page 74.)

•Scan to USB: You can specify image size, file format, or color mode

for each scanning to USB job. (See "Scan to USB" on page 71. )

PLUGGING IN A USB MEMORY DEVICE

The USB memory port on the left side of your machine is designed for USB

V1.1 and USB V2.0 memory devices. Your machine supports USB memory

devices with FAT16/FAT32 and sector size of 512 bytes.

Check your USB memory device’s file system from your dealer.

You must use only an authorized USB memory device with an A plug type

connector.

Use only a metal-shielded USB memory device.

Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on the left side of

your machine.

When an USB memory is inserted into the USB memory port on your

machine, USB icon shows on the display screen.

• Do not remove the USB memory device while the machine is in

operation, or writing to or reading from USB memory. The

machine warranty does not cover damage caused by use’s

misuse.

• If your USB memory device has certain features, such as security

settings and password settings, your machine may not

automatically detect it. For details about these features, see

device’s User’s Guide.

SCANNING TO AN USB MEMORY DEVICE

You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto a USB

memory device. When you scan a document, the machine uses the default

settings such as the resolution. You can also customize your own scan

setting. (See "Changing the scan feature settings" on page 72.)

Scanning

1. Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your

machine.

2. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner

glass with a single original document, face down.

3. Press USB from the Main screen.

4. Press Scan to USB.

5. Set the scan features in the Advanced, Image, or Output tabs. (See

"Changing the scan feature settings" on page 72.)

6. Press Start on the control panel to begin scanning.

7. After scanning is complete, you can remove the USB memory device

from the machine.

SCAN TO USB

Basic tab

•Name: The folder names on the USB memory device.

•Date: Tha date which folders are made.

•Select: Selects the folder which has been chosen from the Name.

•New Folder: Makes a new folder on the USB memory device.

•Detail: Views the details of currently selected folder or file.

•Rename: Renames the folder or file name.

•Delete: Deletes the folder on the USB memory device.

•Duplex: Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the

paper (1 Sided), both sides of the paper (2 Sided), or both sides of

paper but back is rotated 180 degrees (2 Sided, Rotate Side 2).

•Resolution: Selects the scanning resolution value.

•File Name: Names a file before you scan a document by just clicking

this field.

•Back: Returns to the previous screen.

Advanced tab

•Original Size: Sets the originals to a specific fixed size. (See

"Original Size" on page 72. )

•Back: Returns to the previous screen.

Image tab

•Original Type: Selects whether the original is text or photo. (See

"Original Type" on page 72.)

•Color Mode: Adjusts the color options of the scan output. If the

original is color and you want to scan in color, press Color Mode.

(See "Color Mode" on page 72.)

•Darkness: Adjusts the degree of darkness of the scan output. Use

left/right arrow to adjust the values. (See "Darkness" on page 73.)

•Erase Background: Erases backgrounds like paper patterns. (See

"Erase Background" on page 73.)

•Scan to Edge: Scans originals from edge-to-edge. (See "Scan to

Edge" on page 73.)

•Back: Returns to the previous screen.

Output tab

•Quality: Adjusts the display quality of the scan output. (See

"Quality" on page 73.)

•Scan Preset: Automatically changes some scan options such as file

format, resolution, and more. You can adjust options to fit each

specific purpose. (See "Scan Preset" on page 73.)

•File Format: Selects the file format of the scan output. (See "File

Format" on page 73.)

•File Policy: Selects the file format of the scan output. (See "File

Policy" on page 73.)

•Back: Returns to the previous screen.

CHANGING THE SCAN FEATURE SETTINGS

This part explains how to adjust the document settings for each scan job,

such as resolution, duplex, original size, type, color mode, darkness, and

more. The options you change will be maintained for a certain time, but after

that period, the options will be reset to default values.

Duplex

This feature especially applies when the original documents to be scanned

are two-sided. You can select whether the machine scans only one side of

the paper or both sides of the paper.

Press USB > Scan to USB > the Basic tab > Duplex. Use left/right arrows

to toggle the values.

•1 Sided: For originals that are printed on one side only.

•2 Sided: For originals that are printed on both sides.

•2 Sided, Rotate Side 2: For originals that are printed on both sides.

But the back is rotated 180 degrees.

Resolution

You can adjust document resolution.

Press USB > Scan to USB > the Basic tab > Resolution. Use left/right

arrows to toggle the values. The higher value you select the clear result you

get. But the scanning time may take longer.

Original Size

The machine senses and determines the size of the original.

Press USB > Scan to USB > the Advanced tab > Original Size. Use up/

down arrows to go to the next screen. Select the appropriate option and

press OK.

Original Type

You can set the original document type in order to enhance the quality of a

document being scanned.

Press USB > Scan to USB > the Image tab > Original Type. Select the

appropriate option and press OK.

•Text: For originals that have text or line art.

•Text/Photo: For originals that have both text and photographs

together.

•Photo: For originals that are continuous tone photographs.

Color Mode

Use this option to scan the original in

Mono

, Gray or

Color

mode.

Press USB > Scan to USB > the Image tab >

Color Mode

. Select the

appropriate option and press OK.

•

Color

: Uses color to display an image. 24 bits per pixel, 8 bits for

each RGB, is used for 1 pixel.

•Gray: Uses the black gradation to display an image. 8 bits per pixel.

•

Mono

: Displays an image in black and white. 1 bit per pixel.

To use 2 Sided and 2 Sided, Rotate Side 2, you have to load the

originals on the DADF. Because, if the machine can not detect the

original on DADF, automatically changes the option to 1 Sided.

The file format JPEG cannot be selected if Mono has been selected

for Color Mode.

Darkness

You can select the degree of darkness of the scanned output. If your

original document is light or faded, press the right arrow to make the output

darker.

Press USB > Scan to USB > the Image tab > Darkness. Press right arrow

to enhance the darkness degree then, press OK.

Erase Background

You can lighten, reduce or deletes the dark background from scanning

colored paper or newspaper originals.

Press USB > Scan to USB > the Image tab >

Erase Background

. Select

the appropriate option and press OK.

•Off: Disables this feature.

•Auto: Optimizes the background.

•Enhance: The higher the number is, the more vivid the background

is.

•Erase: The higher the number is, the lighter the background is.

Scan to Edge

You can set the machine to scan full size of a page as it is. Usually, the

machine scans a page except edges, which means the margin, especially

when you do the copy job with certain sized paper in the tray. But if you

scan and sent it right away via the network, as the file, the machine does not

need to exclude the edges from the originals.

Press USB > Scan to USB > the Image tab > Scan to Edge. Select

and

press OK.

Quality

You can use this option to produce a high quality document. Higher quality

you select a larger file size you get.

Press USB > Scan to USB > the Output tab > Quality.

Scan Preset

This feature allows you to use optimized settings for your specific scan job.

Press USB > Scan to USB > the Output tab > Scan Preset.

•Sharing and Printing: Produces a small-sized file for normal quality

documents.

•High Quality Printing: Set this option for high quality output with the

largest file size.

•Archival Record: For the electronic file which is of the smallest file

size of the output.

•OCR: Produces scanned output for OCR software. You can expect

the highest quality images.

•Simple Scan: Used for a simple document with text only. The file

size of output is small.

•Custom: Applies the current scan settings that you have chosen.

File Format

You can select the file format before you proceed with the scanning job.

Press USB > Scan to USB > the Output tab > File Format.

•PDF: Scans originals in PDF format.

•Single-Page TIFF: Scans originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File

Format), but several originals are scanned as one file.

•Multi-Page TIFF: Scans the originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File

Format), and several originals are scanned as several file.

•JPEG: Scans original in JPEG format.

•BMP: Scans original in BMP format.

File Policy

You can choose the policy for generating file name before you proceed with

the scan job through USB. If the USB memory already has the same name

when you entered a new file name, you can rename or overwrite it.

Press USB > Scan to USB > the Output tab > File Policy.

•Rename: If the USB memory already has the same name when you

entered a new file name, the file will be saved as a different name

that is automatically programmed.

When you set Color Mode to Mono, the Quality option is grayed out.

The file format JPEG cannot be selected if Mono has been selected

for Color Mode.

•Overwrite:You can set the machine to delete previous job

information on USB as you store new job information.

PRINTING FROM A USB MEMORY DEVICE

You can directly print files stored on a USB memory device. You can print

TIFF, BMP, JPEG, and PRN files.

Direct Print option supported file types:

• PRN: Only files created by provided driver with your machine are

compatible.

• PRN files can be created by selecting the Print to file check box when

you print a document. The document will be saved as a PRN file, rather

than printed on paper. Only PRN files created in this fashion can be

printed directly from USB memory. See Software section to learn how to

create a PRN file.

• BMP: BMP Uncompressed

• TIFF: TIFF 6.0 Baseline

• JPEG: JPEG Baseline

• PDF: PDF 1.4 and below

To print a document from a USB memory device:

1. Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your

machine.

Your machine automatically detects the device and reads data stored on it.

2. Press USB from the Main screen.

3. Use up/down arrows until the file you want appears. Select the file

name.

If there is a folder, select folder name and press Select.

4. Press USB Print.

5. Press Start on the control panel.

machine status and advanced setup

This chapter explains how to browse the current status of your machine, and the method of setting for the advanced machine

setup. Please read this chapter carefully in order to use your machine's diverse features.

This chapter includes:

• Machine Setup

• Browsing the machine’s status

• General settings

• Copy Setup

• Fax Setup

• Network Setup

• Authentication

• Optional Service

• Printing a report

MACHINE SETUP

1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

2. Select the appropriate item for your occasion.

•Machine Status: Shows the current machine status.

•Admin Setting: Allows administrator to set up the machine.

When you press Admin Setting, login message pops up. Enter

password and press OK. (Factory setting is 1111.)

•Tray Management: Shows the currently installed tray and their

status. You can also change the paper settings for each tray.

•Usage Page Report: You can print the report on the amount of

printouts depending on the paper size and type.

Machine Status screen

Press Machine Setup on the control panel and press Machine Status.

•Supplies Life tab: Displays the remainders or the usage count of the

machine supplies. Use up/down arrows to switch screens.

•Machine Info tab: Displays the detailed information about the

machine, and some options allows for validating your machine. (See

"Browsing the machine’s status" on page 76.)

•Back: Returns to the previous screen.

Admin Setting screen

Gives you access to detailed machine settings.

•General tab: Sets the basic parameters of the machine such as

location, date, time, and more. (See "General settings" on page 76.)

•Setup tab: Sets the values for fax, network and login. Also you can

set to enable the feature listed on the screen.

•Print/Report tab: Prints configuration or font list and displays a

report of machine features. (See "Printing a report" on page 82.)

•Back: Returns to the previous screen.

When you press Admin Setting, a login message appears. If the

administrator set the password, you have to enter the password every

time you want to use Admin Setting. (See "Setting the authentication

password" on page 30.)

BROWSING THE MACHINE’S STATUS

You can browse the machine information and validate some features of the

machine.

1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

2. Press Machine Status > the Machine Info tab.

GENERAL SETTINGS

Before you get ready to using the machine, it is recommended to set up the

machine parameters.

1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter

password and press OK. (Factory setting is 1111.)

3. Press the General tab.

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Machine Details This option shows the customer support

information on the email address and the phone

number you stored from Admin Setting. Also, you

can check the machine's serial number, or the

hardware and software information specification.

Print/Report You can print various helpful and informative

reports such as

System Report

, Fax Report and

Scan Report

. (See "Printing a machine report" on

page 83.)

Tray Status The screen shows the trays installed on your

machine, and their current configurations. Select

the tray and Edit to change the settings for paper

type and size.

Usage Counters You can view the amount of each category that

your machine has printed so far. To print this

report, See "Printing a report" on page 82..

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Device Info The sub-options available are Service Center

Registration and Contact Info. You may enter

information on service center and purchasing

point.

Date & Time You can set the date and time. (See "Setting the

date and time" on page 30.)

Default Settings •Default Window: Set the first window that will

appear on the display screen after turning on

the machine or waking up from the Power

Save. For example, if you select Fax as a

default window, the first window will be the

Basic tab of the Fax feature. In case you want

to show ID Copy as a default window, you need

to enable this feature in Default Option

previously.

•Default Option: Changes all the default values

for copying, faxing, emailing, scanning and

paper at once. (See "Changing the default

settings" on page 31.)

•Home: Changes the order of windows that will

appears on the display screen.

Depending on the optional kit you installed

or the category you selected, the selectable

options on the display screen may differ.

Measurements This option lets you change the measurement unit

to use (mm or inch), and set the numeric

separation (comma or period).

Timers The machine cancels a printing job if data does

not be received in specific time.

•System Timeout: The machine returns to the

default value after certain time the machine

waits. You can set a time for maximum 10

minutes.

•Held Job Timeout: The machine holds a job

for a specific time period. You can set a time

period for at least an hour.

Language It allows you to change the language that appears

on the touch screen.

Power Saver You can reduce energy consumption by setting

these features. Power Saver has three options,

first Scan Power Save turns off the scanner lamp

under the glass. And Power Save turns off all the

fans within the machine after a certain time. Low

Power Save turns off the fans within the machine

except a core fan for the fuser unit. (See "Using

energy saving feature" on page 30.)

Tray Management This feature allows you to select the tray and

paper you use for a printing job. Paper size, paper

type, and paper color options are adjusted here.

Tray Confirmation Message is to activate the

window asking whether you set the paper size and

type for the just opened tray.

•Auto Tray Switch: If tray1 and tray2 are filled

with letter size paper, when tray1 is empty and

this option is On, then the machine continues

printing with paper in tray2.

•Auto Continue: When the paper is

mismatched, meaning that tray1has filled with

the letter size paper, but the printing job needs

A4 size paper, the machine will wait for 30

seconds to paper in tray1 with proper sized

paper. After 30 seconds, the machine

automatically starts printing with Letter sized

paper.

•Paper Substitution: When the paper is

mismatched, this option sets the machine print

A4 size paper in the Letter size paper or vice

versa.

•Wide A4: It is useful when printing in DOS

mode. This option prints 80 charactors in a

line, which printing 78 charactors in a line is

usual in DOS mode.

Altitude

Adjustment

Print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure,

which atmospheric pressure is determined by the

height of the machine above sea level. This

feature lets you adjust the altitude in a height

district. Higher altitude location need to set this

feature to High 3, which affects print quality.

Output Options Output Options is for, when the staples run out,

you to let the machine stop processing and wait to

refill the staples or continue the job. If you set

Within Job Offsetting to On, the output paper is

placed and sorted by printout-sets.

Contention

Management

This feature lets you to select the priority between

copy jobs and print jobs.

•Priority: Set the priority by numbering the job.

The machine starts from the least to the

highest number in order.

•First In, First Out: The machine does an

asked job in order.

Sound You can adjust the loudness of the machine

sound. Press Fault to adjust the machine's error

sound. Select Conflict if you pressed the wrong

option. Press Selection to sound whenever you

press the selection from your touch screen.

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Supplies

Management

The machine gives you the notification of the

imaging unit and toner cartridge to reorder, and

resets the used fuser counter, bias transfer roller,

feed roller and document feeder friction pad

counter.

Machine Test The machine prints the test image patterns using

Image Quality Test Patterns.

HDD Spooling To spool documents in HDD for the network

printing, select On.

On Demand

Overwrite

You can set the machine to delete previous job

information on HDD as you store new job

information. To activate this feature, go to Admin

Setting > the Setup tab > Optional Service and

set the On Demand Image Overwrite option to

Enable. After activating this feature you can

overwrite a HDD by pressing Start in the display.

Stored Job File

Policy

You can choose the file policy for generating file

name before you proceed with the job through

HDD. If the HDD memory already has the same

name when you entered a new file name, you can

rename or overwrite it.

•Rename: If the HDD memory already has the

same name when you enter a new file name,

the file will be saved as a different name that is

automatically programmed.

•Overwrite: You can set the machine to delete

previous job information on HDD as you store

new job information.

Country You can change the country, then some the

values for fax and paper size will be changed

automatically for your country.

After installing the fax kit, you must change the

country.

Home Window

Background

You can change the touch screen’s background

image.

Multi-Bin You can choose the output mode for printouts.

•Mailbox: Printouts are stacked in the bin you

have set. If you set the mailbox to Bin3,

printouts will be stacked in Bin3.

•Job Separator: Printouts are stacked in the

sequence of job order in each bin. However, if

there is a vacant bin left, the vacant bin has

priority, which means prinouts will be stacked

there first.

•Collator: Printouts are stacked in sets to

match the sequence of originals in each bin.

•Stacker: Printouts are stacked in bins one-by-

one. When Bin1 is full, printouts will be stacked

in Bin2.

You can only use this feature if you have

installed optional 2-Bin Finisher or 4-Bin

Mailbox.

OPTION DESCRIPTION

COPY SETUP

For copy output, you can set up several options in advance.

1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter

password and press OK.

3. Press the Setup tab >

Copy Setup

FAX SETUP

This machine offers you with various options to you for setting up the fax

system. You can change the default settings for your preferences and

needs.

1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter

password and press OK.

3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Page Number If you select this option On, each copy will include

the page number on the bottom of each page.

Time & Date Set this option On in order to print the date and

time on each copy, set from the General tab.

ID Stamp This option is used to set words or a message to

print on your copies. Set this option On and an

input screen will be displayed, write your message

using the pop up keyboard.

Manual ID Copy

Setup

This option sets the ID copy settings such as the

number of images or copying positions manually.

(See "Copying ID with the manual ID copy

option" on page 45.)

The fax options are different from country to country depending on

the international communication regulatory. If the display screen

does not show or gray out some of the fax options explained

herein, it means that the grayed out function does not supported in

your communication environment.

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Machine ID & Fax

Enter the machine ID and fax number which will

be printed at the top of each page. Select the

country name. This option usually pre-set for user.

Receive Start Code This feature works best when you are using an

extension telephone connected to the EXT socket

on the back of your machine. You can receive a

fax from someone you are talking to on the

extension telephone, without going to the fax

machine. (See "Receiving faxes manually using

an extension telephone" on page 63.)

Error Correction

Mode

It helps with poor line quality and makes sure any

faxes you send are properly transmitted to any

other ECM-equipped fax machines. Sending a fax

using ECM may take more time.

Fax Initial Setup You can set Receive Mode for

Telephone

Fax

Answering Machine/Fax

, and Dial Mode at either

Pulse (Dial Pulse) or Tone (Multi Frequency).

When you select Answering Machine/Fax, you

can receive a fax while the line is being used by

the answering machine. (See "Changing the

receive modes" on page 63.)

Contact your local telephone company for Dial

Mode setting information.

Ring to Answer You can specify the number of times the machine

rings before answering an incoming call.

Receive Header Use this option to automatically print the page

number, date and time of fax reception at the

bottom of each page.

Secure Receive You may need to prevent your received faxes from

being accessed by unauthorized people. This

feature restricts printing of received faxes when

the machine is unattended. If you select this

option to On, all incoming faxes go into memory.

A four-digit Passcode is used when you want to

print out received faxes in memory. (See

"Receiving in secure receiving mode" on

page 63.)

Received Fax

Printing

When receiving a fax containing pages longer

than the paper loaded in the tray, the machine can

reduce the size of the original to fit the size of the

paper loaded in the machine. If this feature is set

to Off, the machine cannot reduce the original to

fit onto one page. The original will be divided and

printed in actual size on two or more pages. If you

set this option to On and set the discard size to

10mm and the received data is longer then the

currently set paper in the tray, the machine

minuses the data that would have been on the

specified discard segment.

Redial The machine can automatically redial a remote fax

machine, if it was busy. You can set the number of

redial attempts and an interval between attempts.

Selecting 0 for Redial Times means that the

machine will not use this feature.

Speaker Volume This controls the sound when a fax actually starts

to transfer data. If this option is On, the machine

sounds from a fax starts until a fax finishes. With

Comm. the machine sounds only until the

communication is succeeded. No sound with Off

option.

Prefix Dial This feature allows you to set a prefix of up to five

digits. This number will be dialed before any

automatic number is dialed. User may set this to

access a PABXa (example 9) or area code

number (example 02). When sending a fax, there

may be a job which has same recipient's number

in delay jobs. In this case, the machine can send

faxes to the same recipient in a batch.

Junk Fax Setup The machine does not accept faxes sent from

remote stations if their numbers are stored in the

memory as junk fax numbers. You can enter a

maximum of 10 junk fax numbers. Press Junk

Fax Setup and Edit, then, enter the fax numer. If

you have set Caller ID enabled, you can browse

the last received fax numbers and select a fax

number from the list.

Ring Volume This feature adjusts the ring volume. When you

select Off, the machine does not ring.

Dial Tone Volume When you press On Hook Dial to send a fax, you

can hear a specific tone. To adjust the tone

volume, you can use this feature. Value 1 is the

lowest volume. Use left/right arrows to adjust the

value.

Mailbox Setup •Document Policy: You can set the document

stored in Mailbox to delete or retain documents

after. Select Delete On Poll of each option to

delete, Delete On Print to remain the data.

•Mail Configuration: You can create, edit, or

delete Mailbox. Enter Mailbox ID, Mailbox

Name, Mailbox Passcode by pressing options.

(See "Using Mailbox" on page 66.)

If you set the Notification option to On, you

are notified when a fax is received in

Mailbox. (See "Creating Mailbox" on

page 66.)

Output Tray This feature lets you select the paper tray to use

for receiving a fax.

Toll Save Set the machine to send a fax in the toll save time

for saving. (See "Sending a fax in toll save

time" on page 68.)

Send Batch The machine asks you whether you want to add

the documents to the reserved delay fax, if the fax

number you have dialed is same as the delay fax

number. (See "Adding documents to a reserved

delay fax job" on page 68.)

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Fax Forward

Settings

You can forward a sent or received fax to other

destination by a fax or an email. (See "Forwarding

a received fax to other destination" on page 68.)

Fax Ending Sound This setting selects whether the end fax tone is on

or off.

Set whether you turn on or off the sound of an end

of fax receiving. (See "Setting up the end Fax

tone" on page 69.)

Caller ID If you have set this option, the machine

remembers the last twenty fax numbers.

a.Private Automatic Branch Exchange

OPTION DESCRIPTION

NETWORK SETUP

You may set up the network with the machine's touch screen. Before doing

that, you must have the information concerning the type of network

protocols and computer system you use. If you are not sure which setting to

use, contact your network administrator to configure this machine network.

1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter

password and press OK.

3. Press the Setup tab > Network Setup.

AUTHENTICATION

This feature lets you control and lock all outgoing data, or change the

password.

1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter

password and press OK.

3. Press the Setup tab > Authentication.

OPTION DESCRIPTION

TCP/IP Protocol Select appropriate protocol and configure

parameters to use the network environment.

There are lots of parameters to be set,

therefore, if you are not sure, leave as it is,

or consult the network administrator.

Ethernet Speed Configure the network transmission speed.

Clear Setting Reverts the network settings to the default values.

802.1x You can select the user authentication for network

communication.

For details information consult the network admin-

istrator.

IPv6 Selects this option to use the network environment

through IPv6.

OPTION OPTION DESCRIPTION

Authentication

Mode

Authentication

Mode

It disables Authentication Mode.

Network

Accounting

It enables the authentication mode

which can be used for Job

Accounting Plug-in the

SyncThru™ Web Admin Service

Standard

Accounting

You can set the local account for a

certain user. If the user with that

account performs the printing job,

the machine counts it.

Foreign Device

Interface

When you install the optional FDI

kit, select Foreign Device

Interface Configuration Setup to

activate it.

•Job Timer: If there is not

enough credit, you can set the

machine to cancel a job right

away or wait a designated

amount of time for a deposit.

•Print Job Control: When it is

enabled, the both computer

printing and copying are

possible since the credit

remains. With Disable, only

the copy printing job needs the

credit. (which means a

computer printing a report or a

fax job needs no credits)

•Inhibit Services: When no

credit is left, the machine

disables the copy job only with

Copy Only. With All Services,

scanning service and copy job

are disabled.

OPTIONAL SERVICE

When you want to add the optional features for this machine, you have to

install the optional kit and then set the machine to enable and activate those

features. Follow the next steps to enable those features.

1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter

password and press OK.

3. Press the Setup tab > Optional Service.

Authentication

Mode

(Continue)

Foreign Device

Interface

(Continue)

•Internal Credits: It is used

when you cancel the job or

when the job is cancelled by the

device due to insufficient credits

(coin) or is canceled by user’s

request. If you select Enable,

the machine deposits a credit

equal to the number of sheets

that did not print out correctly,

then it prints next job for free

(for the amount deposited).

With Disable, even if you

cancel the printing job, the

machine includes jammed

paper in the count and the cost

of printing.

•Image Counter: Depends on

whether the machine counts

blank white pages.

Change Admin. Password You can change the password for

the Admin Setting authentication.

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Copy Enables or disables the Copy menu from the main

screen.

Analog Fax After installing the fax kit, select this option

Enable

to use this machine as a fax machine.

Scan to Email Enables or disables the Scan to Email menu from

the scan screen.

Scan to PC Set

Enable

to activate the scanning and sending it

via network.

OPTION OPTION DESCRIPTION

Scan to SMB Enables or disables the Scan to SMB option from

the scan screen.

Scan to FTP Enables or disables the Scan to FTP option from

the scan screen.

On Demand Image

Overwrite

You can set the machine to delete previous job

information on HDD as you store new job

information. Set this option to

Enable

, go to the

General tab > On Demand Overwrite, press

Start in the display to start the overwriting job.

Immediate Image

Overwrite

If you select

Enable

, the machine renews the HDD

memory when you save new job on it.

OPTION DESCRIPTION

PRINTING A REPORT

You can print a report on the machine's configuration or font list, etcetera.

1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter

password and press OK.

3. Press the Print/Report tab.

OPTION OPTION DESCRIPTION

Print You can print Network

Configuration, PS3 Font List,

PCL Font List and Schedule

Jobs Report. Schedule Jobs

Report shows the job list in

pending, in delayed faxing or the

Mailbox list as well.

Accounting

Reports

Supplies

Information

You can print the amount of each

category that your machine has

printed so far.

Network Auth.

Log Report

It displays user login IDs and

emails.

Usage Page

Report

You can print the report on the

amount of printouts depending on

the paper size and type.

Accounting

Report

Prints the report of printing out

count for each login user.

Standard Acct.

Usage Report

Prints the used amout of

Standard Accounting

Standard Acct.

Remain Report

Prints the remained amout of

Standard Accounting

Report Configuration

Report

You can print a report on the

machine's overall configuration.

Fax Report You can set to print the

information of a fax reports.

•Multi Send Report: When you

fax to several destination, set

this option to print a

transmission report. On is to

print every time you send a

fax, the machine prints a

confirmation report. With On-

Error, only when the

transmission error occurred,

the report will be printed out.

•Fax Send Report

Appearance: You can select

whether the image on the

confirmation report shows or

not.

•Fax Sent/Received Report:

The machine stores the logs

on each transmission and

prints out every 50 logs with

this option On. It you select

Off, the machine stores the

logs but does not print.

•Fax Send Report: The

machine prints the

confirmation report after each

fax job, only when you send a

fax to one destination.

Report

(Continue)

E-mail

Confirmation

Report

The report shows the job of

scanning and sending it via Scan

to Email.

•On: The report is printed

whether a job successfully

completed or failed.

•Off: No report is printed after

completing a job.

•On-Error: Only in case of error

occurrence, the machine prints

the report.

Scan to Server

Confirmation

The report shows the job of

scanning and sending it via SMB

and FTP.

•On: The report is printed

whether a job successfully

completed or failed.

•Off: No report is printed after

completing a job.

•On-Error: Only in case of error

occurrence, the machine prints

the report.

You can also print machine's status information and browse status

with SyncThru Web Service. Open the web browser on your

networked computer and type the IP address of your machine.

When SyncThru Web Service opens, click Information > Print

information.

OPTION OPTION DESCRIPTION

maintenance

This chapter provides information for maintaining your machine and the toner cartridge.

This chapter includes

• Printing a machine report

• Monitoring the supplies life

• Finding the serial number

• Sending the toner reorder notification

• Sending the imaging unit reorder notification

• Checking Document Box

• Cleaning your machine

• Maintaining the Toner cartridge

• Maintaining the imaging unit

• Maintenance Parts

PRINTING A MACHINE REPORT

You can print the machine's information and job report.

1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

2. Press

Machine Status

> the

Machine Info

tab >

Print/Report

3. Select the report type, then the right side of the screen shows the list to

print.

4. Select the list to print.

5. Press Print.

MONITORING THE SUPPLIES LIFE

If you want to view the supply life indicators, follow the next step.

1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

2. Press

Machine Status

3. Scroll down to browse the entire supplies list view the percentage

remaining.

FINDING THE SERIAL NUMBER

If you want to check your serial number from the screen, follow the next

steps.

1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

2. Press

Machine Status

> the

Machine Info

tab >

Machine Details

SENDING THE IMAGING UNIT REORDER

NOTIFICATION

You can set the machine to alert you that the life of the imaging unit is

almost over and needs to be reordered.

1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

2. Press

Admin Setting

. When the login message pops up, then enter

password and press

3. Press the General tab > Supplies Management > Imaging Unit

Reorder Notification.

4. Press Imaging Unit Low Alert to enable this option not, and press

Imaging Unit Low Alert Level to set the remained life level.

5. Press

SENDING THE TONER REORDER

NOTIFICATION

You can set the machine to alert you that the toner level is low and needs to

be reordered.

1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

2. Press

Admin Setting

. When the login message pops up, then enter

password and press

3. Press the General tab > Supplies Management > Toner Cartridge

Reorder Notification.

4. Press Toner Low Alert to enable this option not, and press Toner Low

Alert Level to set the remained life level.

5. Press

• If you want to print the machine's network information or font list,

press Machine Setup > Admin Setting > the Print/Report tab >

Report. In case you select the Configuration Report, just press

Print Now to print the report. The Fax Report, E-mail

Confirmation Report, and Scan to Server Confirmation options

do not provide the print, these are only for report setup.

• You can use SyncThru Web Service to print the machine's

configuration or browse the status. Open the web browser in the

networked computer, and type the machine's IP address. When

SyncThru Web Service is opened, click Information > Print

information.

CHECKING DOCUMENT BOX

The machine shows the document box list of the print or fax job.

Press Document Box on the Main screen. If the screen displays an other

menu, press ( ) to go to the Main screen.

•

User Box

tab: Create the box where you can save the document

such as the file you have printed, sent by email or scanned. When

you create a box, you can set the password to secure your box. The

box with a password is called Secured Box, and without it, it is

called public box.

•System Box tab: The machine provided default boxes, which you

cannot modify them.

•Type: Shows the box is secured or not.

•Box Name: Shows the box name.

•Owner: Shows the user name of a box.

•Date: Shows the date of a box created.

•File: Shows the number of total files in the box.

•Add: Lets you add more boxes.

•

Delete

: Deletes the selected box.

•Edit: Lets you to modify a box name and an owner name.

•

Detail

: Shows box information.

•Search: Searches a box with a box name or an owner name.

•Enter: Prints or sends the stored file in the box.

CLEANING YOUR MACHINE

To maintain print and scan quality, follow the cleaning procedures below

each time the toner cartridge is replaced or if print and scan quality

problems occur.

Cleaning the outside

Clean the machine cabinet with a soft lint-free cloth. You can dampen the

cloth slightly with water, but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into

the machine.

Cleaning the inside

Contact a service representative to clean the inside of the machine.

Cleaning the transfer unit

The cleaning the transfer unit within this machine is recommended for its

printing quality. The cleaning period is best once a year or once 10,000

pages printing.

1. Prepare a soft lint-free cloth.

2. Turn off the machine.

3. Unplug the power cable.

4. Open the side cover.

5. Wipe the surface of the transfer unit.

6. Close the side cover.

7. Plug the power cable and turn the machine on.

Cleaning the scan unit

Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies. We

suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and during the

day, as needed.

1. Slightly dampen a soft lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.

2. Open the scanner lid.

• Cleaning the cabinet of the machine with cleaning materials

containing large amounts of alcohol, solvent, or other strong

substances can discolor or distort the cabinet.

• If your machine or its surrounding is contaminated with toner, we

recommend you to use cloth or tissue dampened with water to

clean it. If you use a vacuum cleaner, toner blows in the air and

might be harmful to you.

3. Wipe the surface of the scanner glass and DADF glass until it is clean

and dry.

4. Wipe the underside of the scanner lid and white sheet until it is clean

and dry.

5. Close the scanner lid.

MAINTAINING THE TONER CARTRIDGE

Toner cartridge storage

Toner cartridges contain components that are sensitive to light,

temperature, and humidity. Samsung suggests users follow the

recommendations to ensure the optimum performance, highest quality, and

longest life from your new Samsung toner cartridge.

Store this cartridge in the same environment as the printer it will be used in;

this should be in controlled office temperature and humidity conditions. The

toner cartridge should remain in its original, unopened package until

installation – If original packaging is not available, cover the top opening of

the cartridge with paper and store in a dark cabinet.

Opening the cartridge package prior to use dramatically shortens its useful

shelf and operating life. Do not store on the floor. If the toner cartridge is

removed from the printer, always store the cartridge:

• Inside the protective bag from the original package

• Correct side up in a horizontal position (not standing on end)

• Do not store consumables in;

- Temperature greater than 40°C (104°F).

- Humidity range less than 20% and not greater than 80%.

- An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature.

- Direct sunlight or room light.

- Dusty places.

- A car for a long period of time.

- An environment where corrosive gases are present.

- An environment with salty air.

Handling instructions

• Do not touch the surface of the photosensitive drum in the cartridge.

• Do not expose the cartridge to unnecessary vibrations or shock.

• Never manually rotate the drum, especially in the reverse direction; this

can cause internal damage and toner spillage.

Use of non-Samsung and refilled toner cartridge

Samsung Electronics does not recommend or approve the use of non-

Samsung brand toner cartridges in your printer including generic, store

brand, refilled, or remanufactured toner cartridges.

Estimated cartridge life

Estimated cartridge life (the life of the toner cartridge yield) depends on the

amount of toner that print jobs require. The actual print-out number may

vary depending on the print density of the pages you print on, operating

environment, printing interval, media type, and/or media size. For example,

if you print a lot of graphics, the consumption of the toner is high and you

may need to change the cartridge more often.

Replacing the toner cartridge

When the toner cartridge is completely empty:

•End of life, Replace with new toner cartridge appears on the display.

• The machine stops printing. Incoming faxes are saved in memry.

At this stage, the toner cartridge needs to be replaced.Check the type of the

toner cartridge for your machine. (See "Supplies" on page 112.)

1. Open the side cover.

2. Open the front cover.

1white sheet

2DADF glass

3scanner lid

4scanner glass

• Samsung’s printer warranty does not cover damage to the

machine caused by the use of a refilled, remanufactured, or non-

Samsung brand toner cartridge.

3. Turn the cartridge locking lever toward the right until you hear a 'click', to

release the toner cartridge.

4. Lift the locking lever and pull the toner cartridge out.

5. Remove the new toner cartridge from its bag.

6. Thoroughly roll the cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner

evenly inside the cartridge.

7. Hold the toner cartridge by the handle and slowly insert the cartridge into

the opening in the machine.

8. Slide the new toner cartridge in until it locks in place.

9. Turn the cartridge locking lever toward the left until you hear a 'click'.

10. Close the front cover, then the side cover.

MAINTAINING THE IMAGING UNIT

Expected cartridge life

The useful life of the imaging unit is approximately 80,000 pages. The

screen displays Replace with new imaging unit when the life of the

imaging unit is almost ended. Approximately 6,000 more pages can be

made after the warning message related to the imaging unit, but you should

have a replacement imaging unit in stock. Imaging unit yield may be

affected by the operating environment, optional, printing interval, media type

and media size.

•Replace with new imaging unit appears on the display.

For ordering information for imaging unit. (See "Supplies" on page 112.)

If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash

clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.

After replacing the toner cartridge, wait for several minutes without

powering off until the machine enters to standby mode. Otherwise it

may cause malfunction of the machine.

To prevent damage to the imaging unit, do not expose it to light for

more than a few minutes.

Replacing the imaging unit

1. Open the side cover.

2. Open the front cover.

3. Turn the cartridge locking lever toward the right until you hear a 'click', to

release the toner cartridge.

4. Lift the locking lever and pull the toner cartridge out.

5. Pull the used imaging unit out.

6. Remove the new imaging unit from its bag.

7. Open the carefully pull the seal tape out of the cartridge.

8. Thoroughly shake the imaging unit side to side five or six times.

9. Unpack the new imaging unit and slide it into place, making sure not to

touch the surface of the imaging unit.

The toner cartridge must be removed to replace the imaging unit.

If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash

clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.

Do not touch the green part, midside of the imaging unit. Use the

handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.

10. Slide the toner cartridge in until it locks in place.

11. Turn the cartridge locking lever toward the left until you hear a 'click'.

12. Close the front cover, then the side cover.

MAINTENANCE PARTS

To avoid print quality and paper feed problems resulting from worn parts

and to maintain your machine in top working condition the following items

will need to be replaced after the specified number of pages or when the life

span of each item has expired.

We highly recommend that this maintenance be performed by an authorized

service provider, dealer or the retailer where you bought the machine. The

warranty does not cover the replacement of the maintenance parts after

their lifespan.

After replacing the toner cartridge, wait for several minutes without

powering off until the machine enters to standby mode. Otherwise it

may cause malfunction of the machine.

ITEMS YIELD (AVERAGE)

DADF rubber pad Approx. 50,000 pages

Multi-purpose tray rubber pad Approx. 50,000 pages

DADF feed roller Approx. 250,000 pages

Multi-purpose tray feed roller Approx. 200,000 pages

Transfer roller Approx. 125,000 pages

Fuser unit Approx. 250,000 pages

Paper Feed roller Approx. 250,000 pages

troubleshooting

This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error.

This chapter includes:

• Tips for avoiding paper jams

• Clearing document jams

• Clearing paper jams

• Understanding display messages

• Solving other problems

TIPS FOR AVOIDING PAPER JAMS

By selecting the correct media types, most paper jams can be avoided.

When a paper jam occurs, follow the steps outlined on page 89.

• Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly. (see

"Loading paper" on page 38)

• Do not overload the tray. Ensure that the paper level is below the paper

capacity mark on the inside of the tray.

• Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing.

• Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading.

• Do not use creased, damp, or highly curled paper.

• Do not mix paper types in a tray.

• Use only recommended print media. (See "In the multi-purpose tray" on

page96)

• Ensure that the recommended side of the print media is facing down in

the tray, or facing down in the multi-purpose tray.

• If paper jams occur frequently when you print on A5/B5-sized paper:

Load the paper into the tray with the long edge facing the front of the

tray. If load the paper this way, printing both sides of the paper (Duplex)

is not supported.

In the printer properties window, set the page orientation to be rotated

90 degrees. See Software section.

CLEARING DOCUMENT JAMS

When an original jams while passing through the DADF, the warming

message appears on the display screen.

1. Remove any remaining pages from the DADF.

2. Open the DADF cover.

3. Gently remove the jammed paper from the DADF.

4. Close the DADF cover. Then reload the pages you removed, if any, in

the DADF.

To avoid tearing the document, remove the jammed document gently

and slowly.

To prevent document jams, use the scanner glass for thick, thin, or

mixed paper-type originals.

If you see no paper in this area, refer to Roller misfeed. (See "In

the multi-purpose tray" on page96)

Misfeed of exiting paper

1. Remove the remaining documents from the DADF.

2. Open the DADF cover.

3. Open the document input tray upwards and pull the document gently out

of the DADF.

4. Close the DADF cover and the document input tray. Then place the

documents back in the DADF.

Roller misfeed

1. Open the scanner lid.

2. Grasp the misfeed paper, and remove the paper from the feed area by

carefully pulling it to the right using both hands.

If you do not see the paper in this area, stop and go to step 3.

3. Open the white document background.

4. Remove the paper from the feed area by carefully pulling.

1scanner lid

5. Close the white document background and the scanner lid. Then load

the removed pages back into the DADF.

CLEARING PAPER JAMS

When a paper jam occurs, the warming message appears on the display

screen. Refer to the table below to locate and clear the paper jam.

In the tray 1

1. Pull out the paper tray to open. After you pull it out completely, lift the

front part of the tray up slightly to release the tray from the machine.

2. Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.

Once you remove the jammed paper here, open the side cover and then

close it to clear the error message on the display.

If there is any resistance, and the paper does not move immediately when

you pull, stop pulling. Then:

3. Open the side cover.

MESSAGE LOCATION OF JAM GO TO

Paper Jam in tray 1,

Paper Jam in tray 2,

Paper Jam in tray 2

(HCF),

Paper Jam in tray 3,

Paper Jam in tray 3

(HCF),

Paper Jam in tray 4,

Paper Jam in MP

tray

In the paper feed area

(tray 1, optional tray, or

multi-purpose tray)

See "In the multi-

purpose tray" on

page 95.

See "In the multi-

purpose tray" on

page96

See "In the multi-

purpose tray" on

page96

Paper Jam in exit

area

In the fuser area or

around the toner

cartridge

See "In the multi-

purpose tray" on

page96

Paper Jam inside of

machine

In the paper exit area See "In the multi-

purpose tray" on

page96

Paper Jam at the

bottom of duplex

path,

Paper Jam at the

top of duplex path,

Paper Jam inside of

duplex path

In the duplex unit See "In the multi-

purpose tray" on

page96

Paper jam in front

of finisher

In the stacker unit See "In the multi-

purpose tray" on

page96

Paper jam inside

finisher, Paper jam

inside finisher’s

duplex

In the stacker unit See "In the multi-

purpose tray" on

page96

Paper jam at exit of

finisher

In the stacker unit See "In the multi-

purpose tray" on

page96

To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out gently and

slowly. Follow the instructions in the following sections to clear the

jam.

4. Carefully remove the misfeed paper in the direction shown.

5. Close the side cover and insert the paper tray. Lower the rear part of the

Tray to align the rear edge with the corresponding slot of the machine,

then insert it completely.

In the optional tray

1. Open the outer cover in tray 2.

2. Open the inner cover of tray 2.

3. Pull the jammed paper out in the direction shown. To avoid tearing the

paper, pull it out gently and slowly.

If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see the paper

Do not touch the shiny imaging unit surface. Scratches or smudges

will result in poor print quality. This part explains the method of removing the jammed paper in the

optional tray 2. Please refer to the next method for other optional trays,

since the method is same as the tray 2.

in this area, stop and go to step 4.

4. Pull out the optional tray 2.

5. Lift the front part of the tray slightly up to release the tray from the

machine.

If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see the paper

in this area, stop and go to step 6.

6. Remove the paper in the direction shown. To avoid tearing the paper,

pull it out gently and slowly.

7. Insert the tray 2 and close the two covers.

In the optional high capacity feeder

1. Open the outer cover of the high capacity feeder.

2. Open the inner cover of the high capacity feeder.

3. Pull the jammed paper out, in the direction shown, pulling gently and

slowly in order to avoid tearing the paper.

If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see the paper

in this area, stop and go to step 4.

4. Pull out the optional high capacity feeder.

5. Lift the front part of the tray slightly up to release the tray from the

machine.

If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see the paper

in this area, stop and go to step 6.

If you do not see any paper in this area, stop and go to step 6.

6. Remove the paper in the direction shown. Pull it out gently and slowly in

order to avoid tearing the paper.

7. Insert the optional high capacity feeder and close the two covers.

In the multi-purpose tray

1. If the paper is not feeding properly, pull the paper out of the machine.

2. Open and close the side cover. Printing automatically resumes.

In the fuser area or around the toner cartridge

1. Open the side cover.

2. Remove the jammed paper, in the direction shown.

3. Close the side cover.

In the paper exit area

1. Open the side cover.

2. Gently pull the paper out through the exit area.

3. Close the side cover. Printing automatically resumes.

The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the

machine.

In the duplex unit area

If the duplex unit is not inserted correctly, paper jam may occur. Make sure

that the duplex unit is inserted correctly.

1. Open the side cover.

2. Release the guide to pull the jammed paper easily.

3. Remove the jammed paper.

4. Close the side cover.

In the stacker (finisher)

Paper jam in front of finisher

1. Open the stacker front cover.

2. Press the right part of lever (1c) and hold still, then push the stacker

to the left to release the stacker.

3. Remove the jammed paper.

4. Slide in the stacker until you hear the sound ‘click’.

5. Close the stacker front cover.

Paper jam inside finisher, Paper jam inside finisher’s

duplex

1. Open the stacker front cover.

2. Pull the stacker lever 1a down. If necessary, pull the stacker lever 1b

down as well.

3. Remove the jammed paper.

4. Pull up on the stacker lever and then close the stacker front cover.

Paper jam at exit of finisher

1. Gently pull the paper out through the exit area.

UNDERSTANDING DISPLAY MESSAGES

Messages appear on the Smart Panel program window or on the control

panel display to indicate machine status or errors. Refer to the tables below

to understand the messages meaning to correct the problem, if necessary.

Messages and their explanations are listed in alphabetical order.

• If the message is not in the table, cycle the power and try the

printing job again. If the problem persists, call for service.

• When you call for service, it is very convenient to provide the

service representative with the contents of display message.

• Some messages may not appear in the display depending on

options or models.

• [yyy] indicates the part of the machine.

• [zzz] indicates the error code. When you contact the service

center, this error code help to handle the problem.

MESSAGE MEANING SUGGESTED

SOLUTIONS

[yyy] is worn.

Replace with new

one

The life of the part

expires totally.

Replace the part with a

new one. Call for

service.

DC motor does not

operate: [zzz].

Please turn off then

There is a problem in

the control of DC

motor unit.

Turn the machine off

and turn it on again. If

the problem persists,

please call for service.

Did not supply

enough toner.

Remove seal tape &

reinstall

Not supplied toner to

the imaging unit.

• Remove the sealing

tape from the

imaging unit.

• Thoroughly roll the

toner cartridge five or

six times, and

reinstall it.

• Turn the machine off

and turn it on again.

Did not supply

enough toner.

Please open/close

door

The machine received

several papers with

many images, and it

cannot supply the

toner properly.

Open side door and

close it. If the problem

still persists, please call

for service.

Fax memory is

almost full. Print or

remove received fax

Job

There is no more

available fax memory.

No more fax data can

be received.

Delete the received fax

data in the memory to

secure memory. Call

for service.

Fax memory is full.

Print or remove

received fax Job

Available fax memory

is now 1MB.

Delete the received fax

data in the memory to

secure memory. Call

for service.

Finisher door is

open. Close it

The finisher cover is

not securely latched.

Close the finisher until it

locks into place.

Finisher error: [zzz].

Please turn off then

There is a problem in

the finisher unit.

Turn the machine off

and reinstall the finisher

again. Check that the

finisher cable is

connected properly. If

the problem persists,

please call for service.

Fuser error: [zzz].

Please turn off then

There is a problem in

the fuser unit working.

Turn the machine off

and turn it on again. If

the problem persists,

please call for service.

Fuser unit is not

installed correctly.

Install it

The fuser unit is not

installed or correctly.

Install the fuser unit.

Call for service.

End of life, Replace

with new imaging

unit

The toner in the

imaging unit has run

out.

Replace the imaging

unit with a Samsung-

genuine toner cartridge.

(See "In the multi-

purpose tray" on

page96)

Imaging unit is not

compatible. Check

user’s guide

The imaging unit you

have installed is not

for your machine.

Install a Samsung-

genuine imaging unit,

designed for your

machine.

Imaging unit is not

installed. Install it

The imaging unit is

not installed, or the

CRUM (Consumer

Replaceable Unit

Monitor) in the

cartridge is not

connected.

Install the imaging unit.

If it is already installed,

try to reinstall the

imaging unit.

If the problem persists,

please call for service.

Replace with new

imaging unit

The imaging unit is at

the end of its life.

When the imaging unit

replacement message

appears on the screen

and if you select

Continue, this

message displays.

Replace a imaging unit

with a Samsung-

genuine imaging unit.

(See "In the multi-

purpose tray" on

page96)

LSU error: [zzz].

Please turn off then

There is a problem in

the control of LSU

unit.

Turn the machine off

and turn it on again. If

the problem persists,

please call for service.

Motor does not

operate: [zzz].

Please turn off then

There is a problem in

the control of motor

unit.

Turn the machine off

and turn it on again. If

the problem persists,

please call for service.

Original paper does

not feed in scanner

The lead edge of the

document failed to

actuate the scan

sensor within the

correct time after

actuating the

registration sensor.

Open the DADF cover

and remove jammed

original. (See "In the

multi-purpose tray" on

page96)

MESSAGE MEANING SUGGESTED

SOLUTIONS

Original paper is too

long for scanner.

Check size

Oversized document

or double-feeding of

originals.

Open the DADF cover

and remove the

jammed original. (See

"In the multi-purpose

tray" on page96)

Check the document

size whether it is

supported. (See "In the

multi-purpose tray" on

page96)

Original paper jam

in front of scanner

The originals are

jammed in DADF.

Open the DADF cover

and remove the

jammed original. (See

"In the multi-purpose

tray" on page96)

Original paper jam

in front of scanner

duplex path

Paper has jammed

during duplex printing

in the DADF.

Clear the jam. (See "In

the multi-purpose

tray" on page96)

Original paper jam

inside of scanner

The lead edge of the

document failed to

actuate the gate

sensor within the

correct time after

actuating the scan

sensor.

When the machine is

on, jammed paper is

detected in the DADF.

Open the DADF cover

and remove the

jammed original. (See

"In the multi-purpose

tray" on page96)

Original paper jam

while reversing

paper in scanner

The lead edge of the

document failed to

actuate the duplex

sensor within the

correct time when the

document was fed the

wrong way.

Lift up the document

input tray and remove

the jammed original.

(See "In the multi-

purpose tray" on

page96)

Paper jam at exit of

finisher

Paper jammed in the

stacker exit part.

Pull jammed paper

from the stacker exit.

Paper Jam at the

bottom of duplex

path

Paper has jammed

during duplex printing.

Clear the jam. (See "In

the multi-purpose

tray" on page96)

Paper Jam at the top

of duplex path

Paper Jam in exit

area

Paper has jammed in

the fuser area.

Clear the jam. (See "In

the multi-purpose

tray" on page96)

Paper jam in front of

finisher

Paper jammed in the

stacker.

Open the stacker door

and remove jammed

paper by lowering

guide 1a or 1b.

Paper jam inside

finisher

Paper Jam in MP

tray

Paper Misfed from

multi-purpose tray

Clear the jam. (See "In

the multi-purpose

tray" on page96)

MESSAGE MEANING SUGGESTED

SOLUTIONS

Paper Jam in tray 1 Paper misfed from

tray

Or paper has jammed

in the tray feed area.

Or the tray cover is

opened.

Clear the jam. (See "In

the tray 1" on page 91

and see "In the optional

tray" on page 92 and

see "In the optional

high capacity

feeder" on page 93)

Paper Jam in tray 2

(HCF)

Paper Jam in tray 3

(HCF)

Paper Jam in tray 4

Paper jam inside

finisher’s duplex

Paper jammed in the

stacker.

Open the stacker door

and remove jammed

paper by lowering

guide 1a or 1b.

Paper Jam inside of

duplex path

Paper has jammed

during duplex printing.

Clear the jam. (See "In

the multi-purpose

tray" on page96)

Paper Jam inside of

machine

Paper has jammed in

the registration area.

Clear the jam. (See "In

the multi-purpose

tray" on page96)

Scanner locking

switch is locked or

another problem

occurred

The CCD (Charged

Couple Device) lock

has been locked. The

CCD does not detect

its home location or

move.

Unlock the CCD lock.

(See "In the multi-

purpose tray" on

page96) Or turn off the

machine and on again.

Try again. If the

problem persists, call

for service.

Shake toner

cartridge

The toner supply is

low.

Thoroughly roll the new

cartridge five or six

times to distribute the

toner evenly inside the

cartridge.

Staple cartridge is

empty. Replace it

Stapler is run out. Order Staple Cartridge.

(See "In the multi-

purpose tray" on

page96) And replace it.

(See "In the multi-

purpose tray" on

page96)

Staple cartridge is

not installed. Install

it in finisher

The staple cartridge is

not installed.

Install the staple

cartridge following the

steps explained on the

back of the finisher

door. (See "In the multi-

purpose tray" on

page96) If you want to

continue the print job

and disregard of this

error message, go to

Admin Setting to

adjust the option. (See

"In the multi-purpose

tray" on page96)

MESSAGE MEANING SUGGESTED

SOLUTIONS

System error: [zzz].

Please turn off then

There is a problem in

the system operation.

Turn the machine off

and turn it on again. If

the problem persists,

please call for service.

This IP address

conflicts with an IP

address already in

use. Check it

The IP address is

used in other place

elsewhere.

Check the IP address

or obtain a new IP

address.

Toner cartridge is

not compatible.

Check user’s guide

The toner cartridge

you have installed is

not for your machine.

Install a Samsung-

genuine toner cartridge,

designed for your

machine.

Toner cartridge is

not installed. Install

The toner cartridge is

not installed or the

CRUM (Consumer

Replaceable Unit

Monitor) in the

cartridge is not

properly connected.

Try to reinstall the toner

cartridge.

Replace with new

toner cartridge

The toner cartridge is

at the end of its life.

When the toner

cartridge replacement

message appears on

the screen and if you

select Continue, this

message displays.

Rplace a toner

cartridge with a

Samsung-genuine

toner cartridge. (See "In

the multi-purpose

tray" on page96)

End of life, Replace

with new toner

cartridge

The lifespan of the

toner cartridge which

the arrow indicates is

reached.

This message appears

when the toner is

completely empty, and

your machine stops

printing. Replace the

toner cartridge with a

Samsung-genuine

toner cartridge. (See "In

the multi-purpose

tray" on page96)

Prepare new toner

cartridge

The toner cartridge is

almost empty.

Ensure a replacement

cartridge is in stock.

Too much paper in

finisher stacker.

Remove printed

paper

The stacker is full of

printouts.

Remove printouts from

the stacker.

Too much paper in

output bin tray.

Remove printed

paper

The printed papers

are full on the output

tray.

Remove printed outs

from the output tray.

Use Auxiliary

Access

The credit is not

enough to access the

job according to

Foreign Device.

Insert credit into the

Foreign Device.

MESSAGE MEANING SUGGESTED

SOLUTIONS

100

SOLVING OTHER PROBLEMS

The following chart lists some conditions that may occur and the

recommended solutions. Follow the suggested solutions until the problem is

corrected. If the problem persists, please call for service.

Touch screen problem

Paper feeding problems

CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS

The touch screen

does not show

anything.

Turn the machine off and turn it on again. If the

problem persists, please call for service.

CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS

Paper is jammed

during printing.

Clear the paper jam. (See "In the multi-purpose

tray" on page96)

Paper sticks

together.

• Check the maximum paper capacity of the tray.

(See "In the multi-purpose tray" on page96)

• Make sure that you are using the correct type

of paper. (See "In the multi-purpose tray" on

page96)

• Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan the

paper.

• Humid conditions may cause some paper to

stick together.

Multiple sheets of

paper do not feed.

• Different types of paper may be stacked in the

tray. Load paper of only one type, size, and

weight.

• If multiple sheets have caused a paper jam,

clear the paper jam. (See "In the multi-purpose

tray" on page96)

Paper does not feed

into the machine.

• Remove any obstructions from inside the

machine.

• Paper has not been loaded correctly. Remove

paper from the tray and reload it correctly.

• There is too much paper in the tray. Remove

excess paper from the tray.

• The paper is too thick. Use only paper that

meets the specifications required by the

machine. (See "In the multi-purpose tray" on

page96)

• If an original does not feed into the machine,

the DADF rubber pad may require to be

replaced. Contact a service representative.

The paper keeps

jamming.

• There is too much paper in the tray. Remove

excess paper from the tray. If you are printing

on special materials, use the multi-purpose

tray.

• An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use

only paper that meets the specifications

required by the machine. (See "In the multi-

purpose tray" on page96)

• There may be debris inside the machine. Open

the front cover and remove the debris.

• If an original does not feed into the machine,

the DADF rubber pad may need to be

replaced. Contact a service representative.

Transparencies

stick together in the

paper exit.

Use only transparencies specifically designed for

laser printers. Remove each transparency as it

exits from the machine.

Envelopes skew or

fail to feed correctly.

Ensure that the paper guides are against both

sides of the envelopes.

CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS

101

Printing problems

CONDITION

POSSIBLE CAUSE

SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS

CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS

Light or faded print

If a vertical white streak or faded area appears

on the page:

• The toner supply is low. You may be able

to temporarily extend the toner cartridge

life. If this does not improve the print

quality, install a new toner cartridge.

• The paper may not meet paper

specifications; for example, the paper may

be too moist or rough. (See "In the multi-

purpose tray" on page96)

• If the entire page is light, the print

resolution setting is too low or the toner

save mode is on. Adjust the print resolution

and turn the toner save mode off. See the

help screen of the printer driver and refer to

Software section, respectively.

• A combination of faded or smeared defects

may indicate that the toner cartridge needs

cleaning. Contact a service representative.

• The surface of the LSU part inside the

machine may be dirty. Clean the LSU,

contact a service representative.

Toner specks

• The paper may not meet specifications; for

example, the paper may be too moist or

rough. (See "In the multi-purpose tray" on

page96)

• The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the

inside of your machine. Contact a service

representative.

• The paper path may need cleaning. Contact

a service representative.

Dropouts

If faded areas, generally rounded, occur

randomly on the page:

• A single sheet of paper may be defective.

Try reprinting the job.

• The moisture content of the paper is

uneven or the paper has moist spots on its

surface. Try a different brand of paper.

(See "In the multi-purpose tray" on page96)

• The paper lot is bad. The manufacturing

processes can cause some areas to reject

toner. Try a different kind or brand of

paper.

• Change the printer option and try again. Go

to printer properties, click Paper tab, and

set type to Thick Paper. Refer to the

Software section for details.

• If these steps do not correct the problem,

contact a service representative.

103

White Spots White spots appears on the page:

• The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from

a paper falls to the inner devices within the

machine, so the transfer roller may be dirty.

Clean the inside of your machine. (See "In

the multi-purpose tray" on page96) Contact

a service representative.

• The paper path may need cleaning.

Contact a service representative.

Vertical lines

If black vertical streaks appear on the page:

• The surface(drum part) of the imaging unit

inside the machine has probably been

scratched. Remove the imaging unit and

install a new one. (See "In the multi-

purpose tray" on page96)

If white vertical streaks appear on the page:

• The surface of the LSU part inside the

machine may be dirty. Clean the LSU.

Contact a service representative.

Color or Black

background

If the amount of background shading becomes

unacceptable:

• Change to a lighter weight paper. (See "In

the multi-purpose tray" on page96)

• Check the environmental conditions: very

dry conditions (low humidity) or a high level

of humidity (higher than 80% RH) can

increase the amount of background

shading.

• Remove the old imaging unit and then,

install a new one. (See "In the multi-

purpose tray" on page96)

Toner smear

• Clean the inside of the machine. Contact a

service representative.

• Check the paper type and quality. (See "In

the multi-purpose tray" on page96)

• Remove the imaging unit and then, install a

new one. (See "In the multi-purpose tray" on

page96)

Vertical repetitive

defects

If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side

of the page at even intervals:

• The imaging unit may be damaged. If a

repetitive mark occurs on the page, run a

cleaning sheet through several times to

clean the cartridge; contact a service

representative. After the printout, if you still

have the same problems, remove the

imaging unit and then, install a new one.

(See "In the multi-purpose tray" on page96)

• Parts of the machine may have toner on

them. If the defects occur on the back of

the page, the problem will likely correct

itself after a few more pages.

• The fusing assembly may be damaged.

Contact a service representative.

CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS

Background scatter

Background scatter results from bits of toner

randomly distributed on the printed page.

• The paper may be too damp. Try printing

with a different batch of paper. Do not open

packages of paper until necessary so that

the paper does not absorb too much

moisture.

• If background scatter occurs on an

envelope, change the printing layout to

avoid printing over areas that have

overlapping seams on the reverse side.

Printing on seams can cause problems.

• If background scatter covers the entire

surface area of a printed page, adjust the

print resolution through your software

application or in printer properties.

Misformed

characters

• If characters are improperly formed and

producing hollow images, the paper stock

may be too slick. Try different paper. (See

"In the multi-purpose tray" on page96)

• If characters are improperly formed and

producing a wavy effect, the scanner unit

may need service. Contact a service

representative.

Page skew

• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.

• Check the paper type and quality. (See "In

the multi-purpose tray" on page96)

• Ensure that the paper or other material is

loaded correctly and the guides are not too

tight or too loose against the paper stack.

Curl or wave

• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.

• Check the paper type and quality. Both high

temperature and humidity can cause paper

curl. (See "In the multi-purpose tray" on

page96)

• Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also

try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.

Wrinkles or creases

• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.

• Check the paper type and quality. (See "In

the multi-purpose tray" on page96)

• Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also

try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.

CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS

104

Copying problems

Back of printouts

are dirty

Check for leaking toner. Clean the inside of the

machine. Contact a service representative.

Solid Color or

Black pages

• The imaging unit may not be installed

properly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert

it.

• The imaging unit may be defective and need

replacing. Remove the imaging unit and

install a new one. (See "In the multi-purpose

tray" on page96)

• The machine may require repair. Contact a

service representative.

Loose toner

• Clean the inside of the machine. Contact a

service representative.

• Check the paper type and quality. (See "In

the multi-purpose tray" on page96)

• Remove the imaging unit and then, install a

new one. (See "In the multi-purpose tray" on

page96)

• If the problem persists, the machine may

require repair. Contact a service

representative.

Character Voids

Character voids are white areas within parts of

characters that should be solid black:

• If you are using transparencies, try another

type of transparency. Because of the

composition of transparencies, some

character voids are normal.

• You may be printing on the wrong surface

of the paper. Remove the paper and turn it

around.

• The paper may not meet paper

specifications. (See "In the multi-purpose

tray" on page96)

Horizontal stripes

If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears

appear:

• The imaging unit may be installed

improperly. Remove the cartridge and

reinsert it.

• The imaging unit may be defective.

Remove the toner cartridge and install a

new one. (See "In the multi-purpose

tray" on page96)

• If the problem persists, the machine may

require repair. Contact a service

representative.

CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS

Curl

If the printed paper is curled or paper does not

feed into the machine:

• Turn the stack of paper over in the tray.

Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.

• Change the printer option and try again. Go

to printer properties, click Paper tab, and

set type to Thin Paper. Refer to the

Software section for details.

An unknown

image repetitively

appears on a next

few sheets or

loose toner, light

print, or

contamination

occurs.

Your printer is probably being used at an

altitude of 1,000 m (3,281 ft) or above.

The high altitude may affect the print quality

such as loose toner or light imaging. You can

set this option through Paper or Printer tab in

printer driver’s properties. (See "In the multi-

purpose tray" on page96)

CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS

Copies are too light

or too dark.

Use Light and Dark arrows to darken or

lighten the backgrounds of copies.

Smears, lines,

marks, or spots

appears on copies.

• If the defects are on the original, press

Light and Dark arrows to lighten the

background of your copies.

• If there are no defects on the original, clean

the scan unit. (See "In the multi-purpose

tray" on page96)

Copy image is

skewed.

• Ensure that the original is face down on the

scanner glass or face up in the DADF.

• Check that the copy paper is loaded

correctly.

Blank copies print

out.

Ensure that the original is face down on the

scanner glass or face up in the DADF.

Image rubs off the

copy easily.

• Replace the paper in the tray with paper

from a new package.

• In high humidity areas, do not leave paper

in the machine for extended periods of

time.

Frequent copy paper

jams occur.

• Fan the stack of paper, then turn it over in

the tray. Replace the paper in the tray with

a fresh supply. Check/adjust the paper

guides, if necessary.

• Ensure that the paper is the proper paper

weight. 75 g/m2 bond paper is

recommended.

• Check for copy paper or pieces of copy

paper remaining in the machine after a

paper jam has been cleared.

CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS

105

Scanning problems

Fax problems

Toner cartridge

produces fewer

copies than expected

before running out of

toner.

• Your originals may contain pictures, solids,

or heavy lines. For example, your originals

may be forms, newsletters, books, or other

documents that use more toner.

• The machine may be turned on and off

frequently.

• The scanner lid may be left open while

copies are being made.

CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS

The scanner does

not work.

• Make sure that you place the original to be

scanned face down on the scanner glass, or

face up in the DADF.

• There may not be enough available memory

to hold the document you want to scan. Try

the Prescan function to see if that works. Try

lowering the scan resolution rate.

• Check that the printer cable is connected

properly.

• Make sure that the printer cable is not

defective. Switch the cable with a known

good cable. If necessary, replace the cable.

• Check that the scanner is configured

correctly. Check scan setting in the

SmarThru Configuration

or the application

you want to use to make certain that the

scanner job is being sent to the correct port.

The unit scans very

slowly.

• Check if the machine is printing received

data. If so, scan the document after the

received data has been printed.

• Graphics are scanned more slowly than text.

• Communication speed slows in scan mode

because of the large amount of memory

required to analyze and reproduce the

scanned image. Set your computer to the

ECP printer mode through BIOS setting. It

will help to increase the speed. For details

about how to set BIOS, refer to your

computer user’s guide.

CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS

Message appears on

your computer

screen:

• “Device can't be

set to the H/W

mode you want.”

• “Port is being used

by another

program.”

• “Port is Disabled.”

• “Scanner is busy

receiving or

printing data.

When the current

job is completed,

try again.”

• “Invalid handle.”

• “Scanning has

failed.”

• There may be a copying or printing job in

progress. Try your job again when that job is

finished, try your job again.

• The selected port is currently being used.

Restart your computer and try again.

• The printer cable may be improperly

connected or the power may be off.

• The scanner driver is not installed or the

operating environment is not set up properly.

• Ensure that the machine is properly

connected and the power is on, then restart

your computer.

• The USB cable may be improperly

connected or the power may be off.

CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS

The machine is not

working, there is no

display and the

buttons are not

working.

• Unplug the power cord and plug it in again.

• Ensure that there is power being supplied to

the electrical outlet.

No dial tone sounds. • Check that the phone line is properly

connected.

• Check that the phone socket on the wall is

working by plugging in another phone.

The numbers stored

in memory do not

dial correctly.

Make sure that the numbers are stored in

memory correctly. Print a Fax Phone Book

list. (See "In the multi-purpose tray" on

page96)

The original does not

feed into the

machine.

• Make sure that the paper is not wrinkled and

you are inserting it in correctly. Check that

the original is the right size, not too thick or

thin.

• Make sure that the DADF is firmly closed.

• The DADF rubber pad may need to be

replaced. Contact a service representative.

Faxes are not

received

automatically.

• The receiving mode should be set to Fax.

• Make sure that there is paper in the tray.

• Check to see if the display shows any error

message. If it does, clear the problem.

The machine does

not send.

• Make sure that the original is loaded in the

DADF or on the scanner glass.

• Check the fax machine you are sending to,

to see if it can receive your fax.

CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS

106

Common PostScript problems

The following situations are PS language specific and may occur when

several printer languages are being used.

Common Windows problems

The incoming fax has

blank spaces or is of

poor-quality.

• The fax machine sending you the fax may

be faulty.

• A noisy phone line can cause line errors.

• Check your machine by making a copy.

• The toner cartridge may be empty. Replace

the toner cartridge. (See "In the multi-

purpose tray" on page96)

Some of the words

on an incoming fax

are stretched.

The fax machine sending the fax had a

temporary document jam.

There are lines on

the originals you

sent.

Check your scan unit for marks and clean it.

(See "In the multi-purpose tray" on page96)

The machine dials a

number, but the

connection with the

other fax machine

fails.

The other fax machine may be turned off, out

of paper, or cannot answer incoming calls.

Speak with the other machine operator and

ask her/him to solve out the problem.

Faxes do not store in

memory.

There may not be enough memory space to

store the fax. If the display shows the low Fax

memory is full. Print or remove received fax

Job message, delete any faxes you no longer

need from the memory and then try to store the

fax again. Please call for service.

Blank areas appear

at the bottom of each

page or on other

pages, with a small

strip of text at the

top.

You may have chosen the wrong paper

settings in the user option setting. For details

about paper settings. (See "In the multi-

purpose tray" on page96)

To receive a printed or screen-displayed message when PostScript

errors occur, open the Print Options window and click the desired

selection next to the PostScript errors section.

PROBLEM POSSIBLE

CAUSE SOLUTION

PostScript file

cannot be

printed.

The PostScript

driver may not be

installed correctly.

• Install the PostScript

driver, referring to

Software section.

• Print a configuration page

and verify that the PS

version is available for

printing.

• If the problem persists,

contact a service

representative.

“Limit Check

Error” message

appears.

The print job was

too complex.

You might need to reduce the

complexity of the page or

install more memory.

CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS

A PostScript

error page prints.

The print job may

not be PostScript.

Make sure that the print job is

a PostScript job. Check to

see whether the software

application expected a setup

or PostScript header file to be

sent to the machine.

The optional tray

is not selected in

the driver.

The printer driver

has not been

configured to

recognize the

optional tray.

Open the PostScript driver

properties, select the

Device

Settings

tab, and set the

Tray

option of the

Installable

Options

section to

Installed

The machine

does not staple

correctly when

printing more

than one copy

from Acrobat

Reader with a

collate option.

(only in Window/

Macintosh)

It might take

longer to print

when you print a

PDF file as an

image.

Try to print with the latest

Adobe Reader program or

print with turning on "Print as

Image" option from Acrobat

printing options. It might take

longer to print when you print

a PDF file as an image.

The machine

does not staple

correctly when

printing more

than one copy

with a collate

option. (only in

Linux)

Turning off

collation options

on applications

(including CUPS

pstops collation

option) may solve

this problem.

If you want to use the

collation option, go to printer

driver’s advanced option and

turn the collation on.

CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS

“File in Use”

message appears

during installation.

Exit all software applications. Remove all

software from the StartUp Group, then restart

Windows. Reinstall the printer driver.

“General Protection

Fault”, “Exception

OE”, “Spool32”, or

“Illegal Operation”

messages appear.

Close all other applications, reboot Windows

and try printing again.

“Fail To Print”, “A

printer timeout error

occurred.” messages

appear.

These messages may appear during printing.

Just keep waiting until the machine finishes

printing. If the message appears in standby

mode or after printing has been completed,

check the connection and/or whether an error

has occurred.

Refer to Microsoft Windows User’s Guide that came with your

computer for further information on Windows error messages.

PROBLEM POSSIBLE

CAUSE SOLUTION

107

Common Linux problems

CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS

The machine does

not print.

• Check if the printer driver is installed in your

system. Open Unified Driver configurator

and switch to the Printers tab in Printers

configuration window to look at the list of

available printers. Make sure that your

machine is displayed on the list. If not, invoke

Add new printer wizard to set up your device.

• Check if the printer is started. Open Printers

configuration and select your machine on the

printers list. Look at the description in the

Selected printer pane. If its status contains

“(stopped)” string, press the Start button.

After that normal operation of the printer

should be restored. The “stopped” status

might be activated when some problems in

printing occurred. For instance, this could be

an attempt to print document when port is

claimed by a scanning application.

• Check if the port is not busy. Since functional

components of MFP (printer and scanner)

share the same I/O interface (port), the

situation of simultaneous access of different

“consumer” application to the same port is

possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only

one of them at a time is allowed to gain

control over the device. The other

“consumer” will encounter “device busy”

response. You should open ports

configuration and select the port assigned to

your printer. In the Selected port pane you

can see if the port is occupied by some other

application. If this is the case, you should

wait for completion of the current job or

should press Release port button, if you are

sure that the present owner is not functioning

properly.

• Check if your application has special print

option such as “-oraw”. If “-oraw” is specified

in the command line parameter then remove

it to print properly. For Gimp front-end, select

“print” -> “Setup printer” and edit command

line parameter in the command item.

• The CUPS (Common Unix Printing System)

version distributed with SuSE Linux 9.2

(cups-1.1.21) has a problem with ipp

(Internet Printing Protocol) printing.Use the

socket printing instead of ipp or install later

version of CUPS (cups-1.1.22 or higher).

Some color images

come out all black.

This is a known bug in Ghostscript (until GNU

Ghostscript version 7.05) when the base color

space of the document is indexed color space

and it is converted through CIE color space.

Because Postscript uses CIE color space for

Color Matching System, you should upgrade

Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU

Ghostscript version 7.06 or later. You can find

recent Ghostscript versions at

www.ghostscript.com.

Some color images

come out in

unexpected color.

This is a known bug in Ghostscript (until GNU

Ghostscript version 7.xx) when the base color

space of the document is indexed RGB color

space and it is converted through CIE color

space. Because Postscript uses CIE color

space for Color Matching System, you should

upgrade Ghostscript on your system to at least

GNU Ghostscript version 8.xx or later. You can

find recent Ghostscript versions at

www.ghostscript.com.

The machine does

not print whole pages

and its output is half

page printed.

It is a known problem that occurs when a color

printer is used on version 8.51 or earlier of

Ghostscript, 64-bit Linux OS, and reported to

bugs.ghostscript.com as Ghostscript Bug

688252.

The problem is solved in AFPL Ghostscript v.

8.52 or above. Download the latest version of

AFPL Ghostscript from http://sourceforge.net/

projects/ghostscript/ and install it to solve this

problem.

I cannot scan via

Gimp Front-end.

• Check if Gimp Front-end has “Xsane: Device

dialog.” on the “Acquire” menu. If not, you

should install Xsane plug-in for Gimp on the

your computer. You can find Xsane plug-in

package for Gimp on Linux distribution CD or

Gimp home page. For the detail information,

refer to the Help for Linux distribution CD or

Gimp Front-end application.

If you wish to use other kind of scan application,

refer to the Help for application.

I encounter error

“Cannot open port

device file” when

printing a document.

Avoid changing print job parameters (via LPR

GUI, for example) while a print job is in

progress. Known versions of CUPS server

break the print job whenever print options are

changed and then try to restart the job from the

beginning. Since Unified Linux Driver locks port

while printing, the abrupt termination of the

driver keeps the port locked and therefore

unavailable for subsequent print jobs. If this

situation occurred, try to release the port.

CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS

108

The machine does

not appear on the

scanners list.

• Check if your machine is attached to your

computer. Make sure th

at it is connected

properly via the USB port and is turned on.

• Check if the scanner driver for your machine

is installed in your system. Open Unified

Driver configurator, switch to Scanners

configuration, then press Drivers. Make sure

that driver with a name corresponding to

your machine's name is listed in the window.

Check if the port is not busy. Since functional

components of MFP (printer and scanner)

share the same I/O interface (port), the

situation of simultaneous access of different

“consumer” application to the same port is

possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only

one of them at a time is allowed to gain

control over the device. The other

“consumer” will encounter “device busy”

response. This can usually happen while

starting scan procedure, and appropriate

message box appears.

•

To identify the source of the problem, you

should open ports configuration and select the

port assigned to your scanner. port's symbol /

dev/mfp0 corresponds to LP:0 designation

displayed in the scanners’ options, /dev/mfp1

relates to LP:1 and so on. USB ports start at /

dev/mfp4, so scanner on USB:0 relates to /dev/

mfp4 respectively and so forth sequentially. In

the Selected port pane you can see if the port is

occupied by some other appli

cation. If this is

the case, you should wait for completion of

the current job or should press Release port

button, if you are sure that the present port's

owner is not functioning properly.

CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS

The machine does

not scan.

• Check if a document is loaded

into the

machine.

• Check if your machine is connected to the

computer. Make sure if it is connected properly

if I/O error is reported while scanning.

• Check if the port is not busy. Since functional

components of MFP (printer and scanner)

share the same I/O interface (port), the

situation of simultaneous access of different

“consumer” application to the same port is

possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only one

of them at a time is allowed to gain control over

the device. The other “consumer” will

encounter “device busy” response. This can

usually happen while starting scan procedure,

and appropriate message box will be displayed.

To identify the source of the problem, you

should open ports configuration and select the

port assigned to your scanner. port’s symbol /

dev/mfp0 corresponds to LP:0 designation

displayed in the scanners’ options, /dev/mfp1

relates to LP:1 and so on. USB ports start at /

dev/mfp4, so scanner on USB:0 relates to /dev/

mfp4 respectively and so forth sequentially. In

the Selected port pane you can see if the port is

occupied by some other application. If this is

the case, you should wait for completion of the

current job or should press Release port

button, if you are sure that the present port’s

owner is not functioning properly.

Refer to Linux User’s Guide that came with your computer for further

information on Linux error messages.

CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS

109

Common Macintosh problems

CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS

The printer does not

print PDF file correctly.

Some parts of graphics,

text, or illustrations are

missing.

Incompatibility between the PDF file and

the Acrobat products:

Printing the PDF file as an image may

solve this problem. Turn on Print As

Image from the Acrobat printing options.

It will take longer to print when

you print a PDF file as an image.

The document has

printed, but the print job

has not disappeared

from the spooler in Mac

OS 10.3.2.

Update your Mac OS to OS 10.3.3. or

higher.

Some letters are not

displayed normally

during the Cover page

printing.

This problem is caused because Mac OS

cannot create the font during the Cover

page printing. English alphabet and

numbers are displayed normally at the

Cover page.

When printing a

document in Macintosh

with Acrobat Reader 6.0

or higher, colors print

incorrectly.

Make sure that the resolution setting in

your printer driver matches the one in

Acrobat Reader.

Refer to Mac OS User’s Guide that came with your computer for

further information on Mac OS error messages.

110

ordering supplies and accessories

This chapter provides information on purchasing cartridges and accessories available for your machine.

This chapter includes:

• Supplies

• Accessories

• How to purchase

SUPPLIES

When the toner cartridge or imaging unit runs out, you can order the

following type of toner or imaging unit for your machine:

ACCESSORIES

You can purchase and install accessories to enhance your machine’s

performance and capacity.

The optional parts or features may differ by countries. Contact your

sales representatives whether the part you want is available in your

country.

TYPE AVERAGE YIELDA

a.Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752.

PART NUMBER

Toner cartridgeaApprox. 25,000 SCX-D6555A

Imaging unitb

b.Declared yield value is based on a single side of A4- or letter-sized

paper.

Approx. 80,000 SCX-R6555A

Depending on the options and job mode, the imaging unit’s lifespan

may differ.

When purchasing new print cartridges or other supplies, these must

be purchased in the same country where the machine was

purchased. Otherwise, print cartridges or other supplies will be

incompatible with your machine, as configurations of print cartridges

and other supplies vary, depending on the specific country.

ACCESSORY DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER

Memory module Extends your

machine’s memory

capacity.

ML-MEM160: 256 MB

This machine

comes with

256 MB DIMM.

To expand the

memory of your

machine, you

must remove the

existing DIMM

and purchase a

larger one.

Optional tray 2/3/4 If you are experiencing

paper supply problems

frequently, you can

attach an additional 520

sheet tray. You can

print documents in

various sizes and types

of print materials.

SCX-S6555A

High capacity

feeder

If you are frequently

experiencing paper

supply problems, you

can attach an additional

2,100 sheet tray.

SCX-HCF100

Fax option kit This kit lets you use

your machine as a fax

machine.

SCX-FAX210a

After installing

the kit, you have

to set up your

machine to

activate this

machine. (See

Page 114)

Stand You can place the

machine on the

ergonomically-

designed cabinet which

lets you reach the

machine conveniently.

Also, you can easily

move the cabinet with

its wheels, if necessary,

and store

miscellaneous items

like papers into the

cabinet.

• Tall Stand: SCX-

DSK10T

• Short Stand: SCX-

DSK10S

If you do not use

the optional tray

then Tall Stand is

recommended. In

case you add

three optional

trays, use Short

Stand.

Stacker & Stapler

(Finisher)

500 sheets SCX-FIN10S

Staple Cartridge 3 x 5,000 staples per

package, covers

maximum thickness of

50 sheets, 1 staple

position.

SCX-STP000

SmarThru

WorkFlow

This feature lets you

send additional

information along with

the scanned document

to a specified network

location.

SCX-KIT11S

ACCESSORY DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER

111

HOW TO PURCHASE

To order Samsung-authorized supplies or accessories, contact your local

Samsung dealer or the retailer where you purchased your machine, or visit

www.samsungprinter.com and select your country/region to obtain

information on calling for technical support.

FDI (Foreign

Device Interface)

kit

This card is installed

inside the machine to

allow a third party

device such as a coin

operated device or a

card reader. Those

devices allow the pay-

for-print service on your

machine.

SCX-KIT10F

4-Bin Mailbox You can load up to 100

sheets of paper in each

stacker. To use 4-Bin

Mailbox, you need to

purchase and install 2-

Bin Finisher first.

SCX-MBT40S

2-Bin

Finisher(Stacker

&Stapler)

The 2-Bin Finisher

consists of big size

output tray which holds

up to 500 sheets of

paper and small size

output tray which holds

up to 100 sheets of

paper.

SCX-FIN20S

a.Countries which supports the serial telephone system are Germany,

Italia, France, Sweden, Denmark, Finland, Austria, Switzerland,

Belgium, Hungary.

ACCESSORY DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER

112

installing accessories

Your machine is a full-featured model that has been optimized to meet most of your printing needs. Recognizing that each user

may have different requirements, however, Samsung makes several accessories available to enhance your machine’s capabilities.

This chapter includes

• Precautions to take when installing accessories

• Installing a memory DIMM

• Replacing the Stapler

• Enabling Fax feature after installing the fax option kit

PRECAUTIONS TO TAKE WHEN INSTALLING

ACCESSORIES

• Disconnect the power cord

Never remove the control board cover while the power is turned on.

To avoid the possibility of an electrical shock, always disconnect the

power cord when installing or removing ANY internal or external

accessories.

• Discharge static electricity

The control board and internal accessories (network interface card or

memory module) are sensitive to static electricity. Before installing or

removing any internal accessories, discharge static electricity from your

body by touching something metal, such as the metal back plate on any

device plugged into a grounded power source. If you walk around before

finishing the installation, repeat this procedure to discharge any static

electricity again.

INSTALLING A MEMORY DIMM

Your machine has a dual in-line memory module (DIMM) slot. Use this

DIMM slot to install additional memory.

Your machine has 256 MB of memory which can be expanded to 512 MB.

The order information is provided for optional memory DIMM. (See "Memory

module" on page 110.)

Installing a memory module

1. Turn the machine off and unplug all cables from the machine.

2. Open the control board cover by grasping it and slide toward you.

3. Take out a new memory DIMM from the plastic bag.

4. Holding the memory module by the edges, align the memory module on

the slot at about a 30-degree tilt. Make sure that the notches of the

module and the grooves on the slot fit each other.

5. Press the memory module into the slot with care until you hear a “click”.

1control board

cover

The notches and grooves illustrated above may not match those

on an actual DIMM and its slot.

Do not press the memory module strongly or the module may be

damaged. If the module does not seem to fit into the slot properly,

carefully try the previous procedure again.

113

6. Replace the control board cover.

7. Reconnect the power cord and printer cable, and turn the machine on.

Activating the added memory in the PS printer

properties

After installing the memory module, you need to select it in the printer

properties of the PostScript printer driver in order to use it.

1. Make sure that the PostScript printer driver is installed on your

computer. For details about installing the PS printer driver, see Software

section.

2. Click the Windows Start menu.

3. For Windows 2000, select Settings and then Printers.

For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.

For Windows /2008, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >

Printers.

For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >

Devices and Printers.

For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >

Devices and Printers.

4. Select the Samsung SCX-6x55X Series PS printer.

5. Click the right mouse button on the printer icon and select Properties.

6. Select Device Settings.

7. Select the amount of memory you installed from

Printer Memory

in the

Installable Options

section.

8. Click OK.

REPLACING THE STAPLER

When the stapler is completely empty, the message for installing the staple

cartridge appears on the display screen.

1. Open the finisher cover.

2. Pull the stapler unit out.

3. Lift the empty staple cartridge from the stapler unit.

4. Unpack the new staple cartridge.

5. Place the staple cartridge back into the stapler unit.

114

6. Slide the stapler unit in until it locks in place.

7. Close the finisher cover.

ENABLING FAX FEATURE AFTER INSTALLING

THE FAX OPTION KIT

After installing the Fax kit, you have to set up the machine in order to use

this function.

1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

2. Press Admin Setting.

3. When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad

and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 30.)

4. Press the General tab.

5. Press Country.

Change the country, then some the values for fax and paper size will be

changed automatically for your country.

115

specifications

This chapter guides you about this machine’s specifications such as various features.

This chapter includes;

• General specifications

• Printer specifications

• Copier specifications

• Scanner specifications

• Facsimile specifications (optional)

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS

Item Description

DADF Up to 100 sheets 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond)

DADF document

size

• Width: 148.5 to 218 mm

• Length: 145 to 356 mm

Paper input

capacity • Tray 1: 520 multi-page for plain paper (75 g/m2)

• Multi-purpose tray: 100 multi-page for plain paper

(75 g/m2)

• optional tray 2/3/4: 520 multi-page for plain paper

(75 g/m2)

• optional high capacity feeder: 2,100 multi-page

for plain paper (75 g/m2)

For details about paper input capacity, see

"Specification on print media" on page 35.

Paper output

capacity • Face down: 500 sheets 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond)

• Optional stacker: 500 sheets 75 g/m2 (20 lb

bond)

Consumables 2-piece toner cartridge and imaging unit system

Power rating 110 - 127 VAC, or 220 - 240 VAC

See the Rating label on the machine for the correct

voltage, frequency (hertz) and type of current for

your machine.

Power

consumption

• Average operation mode: Less than 750 W

• Power save mode: Less than 25 W

• Stand by mode: Less than 120 W

Noise levela• Standby mode: Less than 30 dBA

• Printing mode: Less than 55 dBA

• Copying mode: Less than 57 dBA

Boot-up time Less than 35 seconds (from sleep mode)

The boot-up time will be longer, if data volume is a

lot in the HDD

Operating

environment

Temperature: 10 °C to 32 °C

Humidity: 20% to 80% RH

Display wVGA (800 x 480 x RGV) color

Toner cartridge

yieldb

Average Cartridge Yield 25,000 standard pages.

Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC

19752.

Imaging unit

yieldc

Approx. 80,000 pages

Memory 256 MB (max. 512 MB)

External

dimension

(W x D x H)

633 x 506 x 641 mm (24.92 x 19.92 x 25.23 inches)

without optional trays

Weight 44.85 Kg (including consumables)

Package weight Paper: 5.4 Kg, Plastic: 1.2 Kg

a. Sound Pressure Level, ISO 7779

b.Average cartridge yield declared in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752.

The number of pages may be affected by the operating environment,

printing interval, media type, and media size.

c. May be affected by operating environment, optional, printing interval,

media type and media size.

Item Description

Printing method Laser Beam Printing

Printing speedaUp to 53 ppm in A4 (55 ppm in Letter)

Duplex printing

speed

Up to 50 ipm in A4 (52 ipm in Letter)

First print out

time

8 seconds (from ready)

Print resolution Up to 1,200 x 1,200 dpi Effective output

Printer language PCL 6, PS 3, PDF Direct V1.4, TIFF, JPEG

OS compatibilityb• PCL Driver: Windows 2000/XP/2003/2008//7/

Server 2008 R2

• PS Driver: Windows 2000/XP/2003/2008//7/

Server 2008 R2, Various Linux OS,

Mac OS 10.3 ~ 10.6

Interface High Speed USB 2.0

Device x1, High Speed USB 2.0 HOST

Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base TX

Item Description

116

COPIER SPECIFICATIONS

SCANNER SPECIFICATIONS

FACSIMILE SPECIFICATIONS (OPTIONAL)

a.Print speed will be affected by operating system used, computing

performance, application software, connect on method, media type,

media size, and job complexity.

b.Please visit www.samsungprinter.com to download the latest software

version.

Item Description

Copy speeda

a.Copy speed is based on single document multiple copy.

Up to 53 ppm in A4 (55 ppm in Letter)

Duplex copy

speed

• Simplex to Duplex (1-2): Up to 50 ipm in A4

(52 ipm in Letter)

• Duplex to Duplex (2-2): Up to 35 ipm in A4

(37 ipm in Letter)

First copy out

time

• Scanner glass: Less than 5 seconds

• DADF: Less than 8 seconds

Copy resolution • Scan:up to 600 x 300 (text, text/photo),

up to 600 x 600 (photo)

• Print:up to 600 x 600 (text, text/photo),

up to 1,200 x 1,200 (photo)

Zoom rate • Scanner glass: 25 to 400%

• DADF: 25 to 200%

Multiple copies 1 to 999 pages

Item Description

Compatibility TWAIN standard / WIA standard

Scanning method DADF and Flat-bed Color CCD (Charge Coupled

Device) module

Resolutiona TWAIN standard: 1,200 x 1,200 dpi (Up to 4,800 x

4,800 dpi by software enhancement)

WIA standard: Up to 600 x 600 dpi

Scan to USB, Scan to PC: 100, 200, 300 dpi

Scan to E-mail, Scan to Server: 100, 200, 300, 400,

600 dpi

Network Scan File

format PDF, TIFF, JPEGb

Effective

scanning length

• Scanner glass: 348 mm (13.7 inches)

• DADF: 348 mm (13.7 inches)

Effective

scanning width

Max. 208 mm (8.2 inches)

Color bit depth • Internal: 36 bits

• External: 24 bits

Mono bit depth 1 bit for Linearity & Halftone

8 bits (External), 12 bits (Internal) for Gray scale

Grayscale 256 levels

a.Due to the applications for scanning, the maximum resolution might

differ.

b. JPEG is not available when you select the mono mode in Color Mode.

Item Description

Compatibility ITU-T G3, Super G3

Applicable line Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) or

behind PABX

Data coding MH/MR/MMR/JBIG/JPEG (Tx only)

Modem speed 33.6 Kbps

Transmission

speed Up to 3 seconds/pagea

a.Standard resolution, MMR(JBIG), Maximum modem speed, Phase"C"

by ITU-T No.1 chart, Memory Tx, ECM.

Maximum

document length

• Scanner glass: 356 mm (14 inches)

• Duplex automatic document glass: 356 mm

(14 inches)

Resolution • Standard: 203 x 98 dpi

• Fine: 203 x 196 dpi

• Super Fine: 300 x 300 dpi, 406 x 392 dpi, 203 x

392 dpi (Rxb only)

b. Rx stands for receiving a fax.

Memory 16 MB

Halftone 256 levels

Auto dialer up to 200 numbers

Item Description

117

glossary

ADF

An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a mechanism that will

automatically feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can

scan some amount of the paper at once.

AppleTalk

AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple, Inc for

computer networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984)

and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.

BIT Depth

A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to

represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image. Higher color

depth gives a broader range of distinct colors. As the number of bits

increases, the number of possible colors becomes impractically large for

a color map. 1-bit color is commonly called as monochrome or black and

white.

BMP

A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows

graphics subsystem (GDI), and used commonly as a simple graphics file

format on that platform.

BOOTP

Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to

obtain its IP address automatically. This is usually done in the bootstrap

process of computers or operating systems running on them. The

BOOTP servers assign the IP address from a pool of addresses to each

client. BOOTP enables 'diskless workstation' computers to obtain an IP

address prior to loading any advanced operating system.

CCD

Charge Coupled Device (CCD) is a hardware which enables the scan

job. CCD Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to

prevent any damage when you move the machine.

Collation

Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When

collation is selected, the device prints an entire set before printing

additional copies.

Control Panel

A control panel is a flat, typically vertical, area where control or

monitoring instruments are displayed. They are typically found in front of

the machine.

Coverage

It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing.

For example, 5% coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5%

image or text on it. So, if the paper or original has complicated images or

lots of text on it, the coverage will be higher and at the same time, a

toner usage will be as much as the coverage.

CSV

Comma Separated Values (CSV). A type of file format, CSV is used to

exchange data between disparate applications. The file format, as it is

used in Microsoft Excel, has become a pseudo standard throughout the

industry, even among non-Microsoft platforms.

DADF

A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is a mechanism that will

automatically feed and flip over an original sheet of paper so that the

machine can scan on both sides of the paper.

Default

The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box

state, reset, or initialized.

DHCP

A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server

networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration parameters

specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information

required by the client host to participate on an IP network. DHCP also

provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to client hosts.

DIMM

Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM), a small circuit board that holds

memory. DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data,

received fax data.

DNS

The Domain Name Server (DNS) is a system that stores information

associated with domain names in a distributed database on networks,

such as the Internet.

Dot Matrix Printer

A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head

that runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact, striking an

ink-soaked cloth ribbon against the paper, much like a typewriter.

DPI

Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for

scanning and printing. Generally, higher DPI results in a higher

resolution, more visible detail in the image, and a larger file size.

DRPD

Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection. Distinctive Ring is a telephone

company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to

answer several different telephone numbers.

Duplex

A mechanism that will automatically flip over a sheet of paper so that the

machine can print (or scan) on both sides of the paper. A printer

equipped with a Duplex can print double-sided of paper.

Duty Cycle

Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer

performance for a month. Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation

such as pages per year. The lifespan means the average capacity of

print-outs, usually within the warranty period. For example, if the duty

cycle is 48,000 pages per month assuming 20 working days, a printer

limits 2,400 pages a day.

ECM

Error Correction Mode (ECM) is an optional transmission mode built into

Class 1 fax machines or fax modems. It automatically detects and

corrects errors in the fax transmission process that are sometimes

caused by telephone line noise.

Emulation

Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as

another.

The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by

understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well

as mentioned in this user's guide.

118

An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different

system, so that the second system behaves like the first system.

Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior, which is

in contrast to simulation, which concerns an abstract model of the

system being simulated, often considering its internal state.

Ethernet

Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local

area networks (LANs). It defines wiring and signaling for the physical

layer, and frame formats and protocols for the media access control

(MAC)/data link layer of the OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized

as IEEE 802.3. It has become the most widespread LAN technology in

use during the 1990s to the present.

EtherTalk

A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer

networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984) and is now

deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.

FDI

Foreign Device Interface (FDI) is a card installed inside the machine to

allow a third party device such as a coin operated device or a card

reader. Those devices allow the pay-for-print service on your machine.

FTP

A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used protocol for

exchanging files over any network that supports the TCP/IP protocol

(such as the Internet or an intranet).

Fuser Unit

The part of a laser printer that melts the toner onto the print media. It

consists of a hot roller and a back-up roller. After toner is transferred

onto the paper, the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that

the toner stays on the paper permanently, which is why paper is warm

when it comes out of a laser printer.

Gateway

A connection between computer networks, or between a computer

network and a telephone line. It is very popular, as it is a computer or a

network that allows access to another computer or network.

Grayscale

A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image

when color images are converted to grayscale; colors are represented

by various shades of gray.

Halftone

An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots.

Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while lighter

areas consist of a smaller number of dots.

HDD

Hard Disk Drive (HDD), commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard

disk, is a non-volatile storage device which stores digitally-encoded data

on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces.

IEEE

The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an

international non-profit, professional organization for the advancement

of technology related to electricity.

IEEE 1284

The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of

Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). The term "1284-B" refers to

a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to

the peripheral (for example, a printer).

Intranet

A private network that uses Internet Protocols, network connectivity, and

possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of

an organization's information or operations with its employees.

Sometimes the term refers only to the most visible service, the internal

website.

IP address

An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that devices use in

order to identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing

the Internet Protocol standard.

IPM

The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a way of measuring the speed of a

printer. An IPM rate indicates the number of single-sided sheets a printer

can complete within one minute.

IPP

The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for

printing as well as managing print jobs, media size, resolution, and so

forth. IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds of

printers, and also supports access control, authentication, and

encryption, making it a much more capable and secure printing solution

than older ones.

IPX/SPX

IPX/SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet

Exchange. It is a networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare

operating systems. IPX and SPX both provide connection services

similar to TCP/IP, with the IPX protocol having similarities to IP, and

SPX having similarities to TCP. IPX/SPX was primarily designed for

local area networks (LANs), and is a very efficient protocol for this

purpose (typically its performance exceeds that of TCP/IP on a LAN).

ISO

The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an

international standard-setting body composed of representatives from

national standards bodies. It produces world-wide industrial and

commercial standards.

ITU-T

The International Telecommunication Union is an international

organization established to standardize and regulate international radio

and telecommunications. Its main tasks include standardization,

allocation of the radio spectrum, and organizing interconnection

arrangements between different countries to allow international phone

calls. A -T out of ITU-T indicates telecommunication.

ITU-T No. 1 chart

Standardized test chart published by ITU-T for document facsimile

transmissions.

JBIG

Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression

standard with no loss of accuracy or quality, which was designed for

compression of binary images, particularly for faxes, but can also be

used on other images.

JPEG

Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a most commonly used

standard method of lossy compression for photographic images. It is the

format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide

Web.

LDAP

The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking

protocol for querying and modifying directory services running over TCP/

IP.

119

LED

A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that indicates

the status of a machine.

MAC address

Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated

with a network adapter. MAC address is a unique 48-bit identifier usually

written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (e. g., 00-00-0c-

34-11-4e). This address is usually hard-coded into a Network Interface

Card (NIC) by its manufacturer, and used as an aid for routers trying to

locate machines on large networks.

MFP

Multi Function Peripheral (MFP) is an office machine that includes the

following functionality in one physical body, so as to have a printer, a

copier, a fax, a scanner and etc.

Modified Huffman (MH) is a compression method for decreasing the

amount of data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines

to transfer the image recommended by ITU-T T.4. MH is a codebook-

based run-length encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress

white space. As most faxes consist mostly of white space, this

minimizes the transmission time of most faxes.

MMR

Modified Modified READ (MMR) is a compression method

recommended by ITU-T T.6.

Modem

A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information,

and also demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted

information.

Modified Read (MR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T

T.4. MR encodes the first scanned line using MH. The next line is

compared to the first, the differences determined, and then the

differences are encoded and transmitted.

NetWare

A network operating system developed by Novell, Inc. It initially used

cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC, and the

network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack.

Today NetWare supports TCP/IP as well as IPX/SPX.

OPC

Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual

image for print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer, and it is

usually green or gray colored and a cylinder shaped.

An exposing unit of a imaging is slowly worn away by its usage of the

printer, and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets scratches

from grits of a paper.

Originals

The first example of something, such as a document, photograph or text,

etc, which is copied, reproduced or translated to produce others, but

which is not itself copied or derived from something else.

OSI

Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a model developed by the

International Organization for Standardization (ISO) for communications.

OSI offers a standard, modular approach to network design that divides

the required set of complex functions into manageable, self-contained,

functional layers. The layers are, from top to bottom, Application,

Presentation, Session, Transport, Network, Data Link and Physical.

PABX

A private automatic branch exchange (PABX) is an automatic telephone

switching system within a private enterprise.

PCL

Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language

(PDL) developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an

industry standard. Originally developed for early inkjet printers, PCL has

been released in varying levels for thermal, matrix printer, and page

printers.

PDF

Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed

by Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a

device independent and resolution independent format.

PostScript

PostScript (PS) is a page description language and programming

language used primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas. -

that is run in an interpreter to generate an image.

Printer Driver

A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer

to the printer.

Print Media

The media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can

be used on a printer, a scanner, a fax or, a copier.

PPM

Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining

how fast a printer works, meaning the number of pages a printer can

produce in one minute.

PRN file

An interface for a device driver, this allows software to interact with the

device driver using standard input/output system calls, which simplifies

many tasks.

Protocol

A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection,

communication, and data transfer between two computing endpoints.

See PostScript.

PSTN

The Public-Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) is the network of the

world's public circuit-switched telephone networks which, on industrial

premises, is usually routed through the switchboard.

Resolution

The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The

higher the dpi, the greater the resolution.

SMB

Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to

share files, printers, serial ports, and miscellaneous communications

between nodes on a network. It also provides an authenticated Inter-

process communication mechanism.

SMTP

Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for e-mail

transmissions across the Internet. SMTP is a relatively simple, text-

based protocol, where one or more recipients of a message are

specified, and then the message text is transferred. It is a client-server

protocol, where the client transmits an email message to the server.

120

Subnet Mask

The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to

determine which part of the address is the network address and which

part is the host address.

TCP/IP

The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP);

the set of communications protocols that implement the protocol stack

on which the Internet and most commercial networks run.

TCR

Transmission Confirmation Report (TCR) provides details of each

transmission such as job status, transmission result and number of

pages sent. This report can be set to print after each job or only after

failed transmissions.

TIFF

Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bitmapped

image format. TIFF describes image data that typically come from

scanners. TIFF images make use of tags, keywords defining the

characteristics of the image that is included in the file. This flexible and

platform-independent format can be used for pictures that have been

made by various image processing applications.

Toner Cartridge

A kind of bottle within a machine like printer which contains toner. Toner

is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers, which forms the text

and images on the printed paper. Toner can be melted by the heat of the

fuser, causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper.

TWAIN

An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAIN-

compliant scanner with a TWAIN-compliant program, a scan can be

initiated from within the program.; an image capture API for Microsoft

Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems.

UNC Path

Uniform Naming Convention (UNC) is a standard way to access network

shares in Window NT and other Microsoft products. The format of a

UNC path is: \\<servername>\<sharename>\<Additional directory>

URL

Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents

and resources on the Internet. The first part of the address indicates

what protocol to use, the second part specifies the IP address or the

domain name where the resource is located.

USB

Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the

USB Implementers Forum, Inc., to connect computers and peripherals.

Unlike the parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a

single computer USB port to multiple peripherals.

Watermark

A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears

lighter when viewed by transmitted light. Watermarks were first

introduced in Bologna, Italy in 1282; they have been used by

papermakers to identify their product, and also on postage stamps,

currency, and other government documents to discourage

counterfeiting.

WIA

Windows Imaging Architecture (WIA) is an imaging architecture that is

originally introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP. A scan can be

initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIA-compliant

scanner.

121

contact samsung worldwide

If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products,

contact the Samsung customer care center.

COUNTRY/REG

ION

CUSTOMER CARE

CENTER WEB SITE

ARGENTINE 0800-333-3733 www.samsung.com

ARMENIA 0-800-05-555

AUSTRALIA 1300 362 603 www.samsung.com

AUSTRIA 0810-SAMSUNG (7267864,

€ 0.07/min)

www.samsung.com

AZERBAIJAN 088-55-55-555

BAHRAIN 8000-4726

BELARUS 810-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.ua

www.samsung.com/ua_ru

BELGIUM 02-201-24-18 www.samsung.com/be

(Dutch)

www.samsung.com/be_fr

(French)

BRAZIL 0800-124-421

4004-0000

www.samsung.com

CANADA 1-800-SAMSUNG

(726-7864)

www.samsung.com

CHILE 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com

CHINA 400-810-5858

010-6475 1880

www.samsung.com

COLOMBIA 01-8000112112 www.samsung.com

COSTA RICA 0-800-507-7267 www.samsung.com

CZECH

REPUBLIC

800-SAMSUNG

(800-726786)

www.samsung.com

Samsung Zrt., česká organizační složka, Oasis Florenc,

Sokolovská394/17, 180 00, Praha 8

DENMARK 70 70 19 70 www.samsung.com

ECUADOR 1-800-10-7267 www.samsung.com

EGYPT 0800-726786

EIRE 0818 717100 www.samsung.com

EL SALVADOR 800-6225 www.samsung.com

ESTONIA 800-7267 www.samsung.com

KAZAKHSTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com/kz_ru

KYRGYZSTAN 00-800-500-55-500

FINLAND 030-6227 515 www.samsung.com

FRANCE 01 48 63 00 00 www.samsung.com

GERMANY 01805 - SAMSUNG

(726-7864 € 0,14/min)

www.samsung.com

GEORGIA 8-800-555-555

GUATEMALA 1-800-299-0013 www.samsung.com

HONDURAS 800-7919267 www.samsung.com

HONG KONG (852) 3698-4698 www.samsung.com/hk

www.samsung.com/hk_en/

HUNGARY 06-80-SAMSUNG

(726-7864)

www.samsung.com

INDIA 3030 8282

1800 110011

1800 3000 8282

1800 266 8282

www.samsung.com

INDONESIA 0800-112-8888

021-5699-7777

www.samsung.com

ITALIA 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com

JAMAICA 1-800-234-7267 www.samsung.com

JAPAN 0120-327-527 www.samsung.com

JORDAN 800-22273

KSA 9200-21230 www.samsung.com

BAHRAIN 8000-4726

LATVIA 8000-7267 www.samsung.com

LITHUANIA 8-800-77777 www.samsung.com

LUXEMBURG 261 03 710 www.samsung.com

MALAYSIA 1800-88-9999 www.samsung.com

MEXICO 01-800-SAMSUNG

(726-7864)

www.samsung.com

MOLDOVA 00-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.ua

www.samsung.com/ua_ru

NETHERLANDS 0900-SAMSUNG

(0900-7267864) (€

0,10/min)

www.samsung.com

NEW ZEALAND 0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726

786)

www.samsung.com

NICARAGUA 00-1800-5077267 www.samsung.com

NORWAY 815-56 480 www.samsung.com

PANAMA 800-7267 www.samsung.com

COUNTRY/REG

ION

CUSTOMER CARE

CENTER WEB SITE

122

PHILIPPINES 1800-10-SAMSUNG

(726-7864)

1-800-3-SAMSUNG

(726-7864)

1-800-8-SAMSUNG

(726-7864)

02-5805777

www.samsung.com

POLAND 0 801 1SAMSUNG

(172678)

022-607-93-33

www.samsung.com

PORTUGAL 80820-SAMSUNG

(726-7864)

www.samsung.com

PUERTO RICO 1-800-682-3180 www.samsung.com

QATAR 800-2255

REP. DOMINICA 1-800-751-2676 www.samsung.com

RUSSIA 8-800-555-55-55 www.samsung.ru

SINGAPORE 1800-SAMSUNG

(726-7864)

www.samsung.com

SLOVAKIA 0800-SAMSUNG

(726-7864)

www.samsung.com

SOUTH AFRICA 0860 SAMSUNG

(726-7864)

www.samsung.com

SPAIN 902-1-SAMSUNG(902 172

678)

www.samsung.com

SWEDEN 0771 726 7864

(SAMSUNG)

www.samsung.com

SWITZERLAND 0848-SAMSUNG (7267864,

CHF 0.08/min)

www.samsung.com

SYRIA 1825-22-73

TADJIKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500

TAIWAN 0800-329-999 www.samsung.com

THAILAND 1800-29-3232

02-689-3232

www.samsung.com

TRINIDAD &

TOBAGO

1-800-SAMSUNG

(726-7864)

www.samsung.com

TURKEY 444 77 11 www.samsung.com

U.A.E 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com

U.K 0845 SAMSUNG

(726-7864)

www.samsung.com

U.S.A 1-800-SAMSUNG

(726-7864)

www.samsung.com

UKRAINE 8-800-502-000 www.samsung.ua

www.samsung.com/ua_ru

COUNTRY/REG

ION

CUSTOMER CARE

CENTER WEB SITE

UZBEKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com/kz_ru

VENEZUELA 0-800-100-5303 www.samsung.com

VIETNAM 1 800 588 889 www.samsung.com

COUNTRY/REG

ION

CUSTOMER CARE

CENTER WEB SITE

123

index

ADF, load 33

adjustment

altitude 29

admin setting 75

altitude adjustment 77

answering machine/fax 63

authentication

network accounting 80

printing a report 76, 82

setting up 30, 76

auto center 48

Book copy 46

checking stored document 84

cleaning

inside 84

outside 84

scan unit 84

transfer unit 84

Clone copy 46

collated 44

color mode

faxing 64

scanning 57, 72

control panel 18, 19

copy

copying 42

covers 47

duplex copy 43

erasing background 47

erasing edge 47

ID stamp 78

making a booklet 46

page number 78

poster 45

reduce/enlarge 43

shifting margin 47

solving copy problems 104

text/photo 44

the size of the originals 42

time & date 78

transparencies 47

copy setup 78

DADF

cover 18

input tray 18

output tray 18

width guides 18

darkness

copying 44

faxing 64

scanning 57, 73

date & time 30, 76

printing date&time in copied out 76, 78

default settings 31

altitude adjustment 77

changing the default settings 31

energy saver 77

language 76

loading paper 30

machine test 77

measurements 76

output option 77

setting a fax header 61

sound 77

supplies management 77

system timeout 76

tray management 77

tray setting 30

driver

installation 28

duplex

copying 43

faxing 64

scanning 56, 72

email address

entering email addresses to input field

Global 52

Group 52

Individual 51

storing 51

energy saver 30

erasing background

copying 47

faxing 64

scanning 57, 73

erasing punch hole 47

error correction mode 78

error message 97

extension telephone 63

fax option kit

enabling option feature after installing

the kit 114

ordering 110

fax receiving

changing the receive mode 63

extension telephone 63

in answering machine/fax 63

in memory 64

secure receiving 63

fax sending

automatic resending 62

delay sending 62

duplex sending 61

redialing the last number 62

sending a fax 61

sending a fax manually 62

sending a priority fax 63

setting a fax header 61

fax setup 78

faxing

color mode 64

darkness 64

enabling the fax kit option 81, 114

erasing background 64

original type 64

phonebook 64

printing a fax report 83

resolution 64

solving faxing problems 105

FDI

authentication 81

FDI (Foreign Interface Device)

ordering 111

finisher (Stacker & Stapler)

ordering 110

paper jam 96

front cover 18

FTP 56

general settings 76

Gray scan 57, 72

124

Group

Group fax number 65

ID copy 44

ID stamp in copying 78

imaging unit 18

imaging unit reorder notification 83

Individual

email addresses for scanning 51

individual fax number 65

jam

clearing paper from the duplex unit area

clearing paper from the exit area 95

clearing paper from the fuser unit 95

clearing paper from the multi-purpose

tray 95

clearing paper from the optional tray 92,

clearing paper from the stacker

(finisher) 96

clearing paper from the toner cartridge

clearing paper from the tray1 91

clearing the original from scanner glass

tips for avoiding paper jams 89

jam, clear

document 89

JPEG 58, 73

keyboard 32

language 30

LED

Interrupt 21

Status 22

Linux problems 107

loading originals

ADF 33

scanner glass 33

Machine Info 75

Machine Setup 75

machine status 76

Mailbox

creating Mailbox 66

deleting the data of the Mailbox 67

Mailbox List 67

Mailbox No. 66

Mailbox Passcode 66

polling 66

printing a Mailbox 67

sending to remote Mailbox 67

storing the originals 67

Maintenance

imaging unit 87

maintenance parts 88

toner cartridge 85, 86

memory DIMM

installing 112

memory module

installing 112

ordering 110

message on the display screen 97

Mono 57, 72

multi-purpose tray 18

network

setting up 26, 80

notification

receiving a fax in Mailbox 67

N-up copy 45

OCR 58, 73

On Hook Dial

sending a fax 62

optional service 81

optional tray 18, 110

original size

copying 42

scanning 57, 72

original type

copying 44

faxing 64

scanning 57, 72

originals

jam, clear 89

loading 33

output options 77

page numbering in copying 78

paper

changing the size 37

clearing jam 91

loading in the multi-purpose tray 39

loading in the optional tray 38

loading in the tray1 38

paper feeding problems 100

paper type

setting 40

phonebook

fax 64

fax phonebook from SyncThru Web

Service 65

polling

deleting the polling document 66

polling a remote fax 66

polling from remote Mailbox 66

printing the polling document 66

storing the originals for polling 66

PostScript

problems 106

Power Save 30

Power Saver

using power save mode 30, 77

print quality problems, solve 102

print/report

accounting reports 82

configuration report 82

e-mail confirmation report 82

fax report 82, 83

network auth. log report 82

network configuration 82

PCL font list 82

PS3 font list 82

scan report 83

scan to server confirmation 82

Schedule jobs report 82

supplies information 82

system report 83

usage page report 82

printing

problem solving 101

USB memory 74

problem, solve

Linux 107

printing quality 102

125

problems

copying 104

display message 97

faxing 105

paper feeder 100

PostScript 106

printing 101

scanning 105

touch screen 100

Windows 106

quality

scanning 58, 73

remote code 78

replacing components

imaging unit 87

toner cartridge 85

replacing stapler 113

Report 82

Resolution

faxing 64

scanning 56

scan preset 58

Scan to Email 51

confirmation 82

Scan to Server 56

confirmation 82

scanned file format 58, 73

scanner glass

loading documents 33

scanner lid 18

Scanner lock switch 18

scanning

color mode 57, 72

darkness 57, 73

enabling the scan kit option 81

erasing background 57, 73

file format 58, 73

original size 57, 72

original type 57, 72

printing an email report 83

quality 58, 73

resolution 56, 72

scan preset 58

sending it via email 51

sending it via FTP 56

sending it via SMB 56

solving scanning problems 105

USB flash memory 71

serial number 83

service center registration 76

shifting margin 47

side cover 18

SMB 56

sound 77

speed dial no. 65

Stacker 110

stand 18, 110

staple cartridge

ordering 110

replacing 113

stored documents 84

supplies

browsing the supplies life 76

checking the supplies life 83

expected imaging unit life 77, 86

expected toner cartridge life 77

management 77

Supplies Management 77

SyncThru Web Service

email address 51

fax settings 65

SMB/FTP setting 56

System timeout 30

telephone 63

terminal ID 78

TIFF 58, 73

toner cartridge 18

toner reorder notification 83

touch screen

problem solving 100

tray

adjusting the width and length 37

optional tray 18

tray1 18

USB flash memory

printing 74

scanning 71

using

SetIP 31

Windows

problems 106

This user’s guide is provided for information purposes only. All information included herein is subject to change without notice.

Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages, arising from or related to use of this user’s guide.

• Samsung and Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.

• PCL and PCL 6 are trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company.

• Microsoft, Windows, Windows , Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

• PostScript 3 is a trademark of Adobe System, Inc.

• UFST® and MicroType™ are registered trademarks of Monotype Imaging Inc.

• TrueType, LaserWriter and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.

• All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations.

• Refer to the 'LICENSE.txt' file in the provided CD-ROM for the open source license information.

REV 1.04

Samsung Printer

Software section

Contents

1. Installing Printer Software in Windows

Installing Printer Software ........................................................................................................ 5

Installing Software for Local Printing ................................................................................. 5

Installing Software for Network Printing ............................................................................. 8

Reinstalling Printer Software ................................................................................................... 11

Removing Printer Software ..................................................................................................... 12

2. Basic Printing

Printing a Document .............................................................................................................. 13

Printing to a file (PRN) .......................................................................................................... 14

Printer Settings ..................................................................................................................... 14

Layout Tab .................................................................................................................. 15

Paper Tab .................................................................................................................... 15

Graphics Tab ............................................................................................................... 16

Extras Tab ................................................................................................................... 17

About Tab ................................................................................................................... 18

Printer Tab .................................................................................................................. 18

Using a Favorite Setting ................................................................................................ 18

Using Help ................................................................................................................... 18

3. Advanced Printing

Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper (N-Up Printing) ..................................................... 19

Printing Posters ..................................................................................................................... 20

Printing Booklets .................................................................................................................. 20

Printing on Both Sides of Paper ............................................................................................... 21

Printing a Reduced or Enlarged Document ................................................................................ 21

Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper Size ......................................................................... 21

Using Watermarks ................................................................................................................. 22

Using an Existing Watermark ......................................................................................... 22

Creating a Watermark ................................................................................................... 22

Editing a Watermark ..................................................................................................... 22

Deleting a Watermark ................................................................................................... 22

Using Overlays ...................................................................................................................... 23

What is an Overlay? ...................................................................................................... 23

Creating a New Page Overlay ......................................................................................... 23

Using a Page Overlay .................................................................................................... 23

Deleting a Page Overlay ................................................................................................ 23

4. Using Windows PostScript Driver

Printer Settings ..................................................................................................................... 24

Advanced .................................................................................................................... 24

Using Help ................................................................................................................... 24

5. Using Direct Printing Utility

Overview Direct Printing Utility ................................................................................................ 25

Printing ................................................................................................................................ 25

From the Direct Printing Utility window ............................................................................ 25

Using the shortcut icon ................................................................................................. 25

Using the right-click menu ............................................................................................. 25

6. Sharing the Printer Locally

Setting Up a Host Computer ................................................................................................... 26

Setting Up a Client Computer .................................................................................................. 26

7. Scanning

Scanning Using Samsung SmarThru Office ................................................................................ 27

Using Samsung SmarThru Office .................................................................................... 27

Uninstalling Samsung SmarThru Office ............................................................................ 28

Using Onscreen Help File ............................................................................................... 29

Scanning Process with TWAIN-enabled Software ........................................................................ 29

Scanning Using the WIA Driver ................................................................................................ 29

Windows XP/Server 2003 .............................................................................................. 29

Windows Vista ............................................................................................................. 29

Windows 7 .................................................................................................................. 30

8. Using Smart Panel

Understanding Smart Panel .................................................................................................... 31

Opening the Troubleshooting Guide ......................................................................................... 32

Changing the Smart Panel Program Settings ............................................................................. 32

9. Using Your Printer in Linux

Getting Started ..................................................................................................................... 33

Installing the Unified Linux Driver ............................................................................................ 33

Installing the Unified Linux Driver ................................................................................... 33

Installing the SmartPanel .............................................................................................. 33

Uninstalling the Unified Linux Driver ............................................................................... 34

Using the Unified Driver Configurator ....................................................................................... 35

Opening the Unified Driver Configurator .......................................................................... 35

Printers Configuration ................................................................................................... 35

Scanners Configuration ................................................................................................. 36

Ports Configuration ....................................................................................................... 36

Configuring Printer Properties ................................................................................................. 37

Printing a Document .............................................................................................................. 37

Printing from Applications .............................................................................................. 37

Printing Files ................................................................................................................ 38

Scanning a Document ............................................................................................................ 38

Using the Image Manager .............................................................................................. 39

10. Using Your Printer with a Macintosh

Installing Software ................................................................................................................ 41

Uninstalling software ............................................................................................................. 41

Setting Up the Printer ............................................................................................................ 42

For a Network-connected ............................................................................................... 42

For a USB-connected .................................................................................................... 42

Printing ................................................................................................................................ 43

Printing a Document ..................................................................................................... 43

Changing Printer Settings .............................................................................................. 43

Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper .................................................................. 45

Duplex Printing ............................................................................................................ 45

Scanning .............................................................................................................................. 46

Installing Printer Software in Windows

1Installing Printer

Software in Windows

This chapter includes:

• Installing Printer Software

• Reinstalling Printer Software

•Removing Printer Software

NOTE

: The following procedure is based on Windows XP, for

other operating systems, refer to the corresponding Windows

user's guide or online help.

Installing Printer Software

You can install the printer software for local printing or network

printing. To install the printer software on the computer,

perform the appropriate installation procedure depending on

the printer in use.

A printer driver is software that lets your computer

communicate with your printer. The procedure to install drivers

may differ depending on the operating system you are using.

All applications should be closed on your PC before beginning

installation.

Installing Software for Local Printing

A local printer is a printer directly attached to your computer

using the printer cable supplied with your printer, such as a USB

or parallel cable. If your printer is attached to a network, skip

this step and go to “Installing Software for Network Printing” on

page 8.

You can install the printer software using the typical or custom

method.

NOTE

: If the “New Hardware Wizard” window appears during

the installation procedure, click in the upper right corner of

the box to close the window, or click

Cancel

Typical Installation

This is recommended for most users. All components necessary

for printer operations will be installed.

Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer

and powered on.

Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.

The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation

window appears.

If the installation window does not appear, click

Start

and

then

Run

. Type

X:\Setup.exe

, replacing “

” with the

letter which represents your drive and click

If you use Windows vista, Windows 7 and Windows Server

2008 R2, click

Start

→

All programs

→

Accessories

→

Run

, and type

X:\Setup.exe

If the

AutoPlay

window appears in Windows vista,

Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, click

Run

Setup.exe

Install or run program

field, and click

Continue

in the

User Account Control

window.

Click

• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.

Select

Typical installation for a local printer

. Click

Installing Printer Software in Windows

NOTE

: If your printer is not already connected to the

computer, the following window will appear.

• After connecting the printer, click

• If you don’t want to connect the printer at this time, click

, and

on the following screen. Then the installation

will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the

installation.

• The installation window that appears in this User’s

Guide may differ depending on the printer and

interface in use.

After the installation is finished, a window asking you to

print a test page appears. If you choose to print a test

page, select the checkbox and click

Otherwise, just click

and skip to step 7.

If the test page prints out correctly, click

Yes

If not, click

to reprint it.

To register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order

to receive information from Samsung, select the checkbox

and click

Finish

. You are now sent to the Samsung web

site.

Otherwise, just click

Finish

NOTE

: After setup is complete, if your printer driver doesn’t

work properly, reinstall the printer driver. See “Reinstalling

Printer Software” on page 11.

Custom Installation

You can choose individual components to install.

Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer

and powered on.

Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.

The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation

window appears.

If the installation window does not appear, click

Start

and

then

Run

. Type

X:\Setup.exe

, replacing “

” with the

letter which represents your drive and click

If you use Windows vista, Windows 7 and Windows Server

2008 R2, click

Start

→

All programs

→

Accessories

→

Run

, and type

X:\Setup.exe

If the

AutoPlay

window appears in Windows vista,

Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, click

Run

Setup.exe

Install or run program

field, and click

Continue

in the

User Account Control

window.

Click

• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.

Installing Printer Software in Windows

Select

Custom installation

. Click

Select your printer and click

NOTE

: If your printer is not already connected to the

computer, the following window will appear.

• After connecting the printer, click

• If you don’t want to connect the printer at this time, click

, and

on the following screen. Then the installation

will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the

installation.

• The installation window that appears in this User’s

Guide may differ depending on the printer and

interface in use.

Select the components to be installed and click

NOTE

: You can change the desired installation folder by

clicking [

Browse

After the installation is finished, a window asking you to

print a test page appears. If you choose to print a test

page, select the checkbox and click

Otherwise, just click

and skip to step 9.

If the test page prints out correctly, click

Yes

If not, click

to reprint it.

To register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order

to receive information from Samsung, select the checkbox

and click

Finish

. You are now sent to the Samsung web

site.

Otherwise, just click

Finish

Installing Printer Software in Windows

Installing Software for Network

Printing

When you connect your printer to a network, you must first

configure the TCP/IP settings for the printer. After you have

assigned and verified the TCP/IP settings, you are ready to

install the software on each computer on the network.

You can install the printer software using the typical or custom

method.

Typical Installation

This is recommended for most users. All components necessary

for printer operations will be installed.

Make sure that the printer is connected to your network

and powered on. For details about connecting to the

network, see the supplied printer’s User’s Guide.

Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.

The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation

window appears.

If the installation window does not appear, click

Start

and

then

Run

. Type

X:\Setup.exe

, replacing “

” with the

letter which represents your drive and click

If you use Windows vista, Windows 7 and Windows Server

2008 R2, click

Start

→

All programs

→

Accessories

→

Run

, and type

X:\Setup.exe

If the

AutoPlay

window appears in Windows vista,

Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, click

Run

Setup.exe

Install or run program

field, and click

Continue

in the

User Account Control

window.

Click

• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.

Select

Typical installation for a network printer

. Click

The list of printers available on the network appears.

Select the printer you want to install from the list and then

click

•

If you click the

Advanced

button, you can search a printer

with the

SNMP Community name

. Default name is

‘public’

• If you do not see your printer on the list, click

Update

refresh the list, or select

Add TCP/IP Port

to add your

printer to the network. To add the printer to the

network, enter the port name and the IP address for the

printer.

To verify your printer’s IP address or the MAC address,

print a Network Configuration page.

• To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select

Shared Printer [UNC]

and enter the shared name

manually or find a shared printer by clicking the

Browse

button.

NOTE

: If you cannot find your machine in network, please turn

off the firewall and click

Update

For Windows operating system, click

Start

→

Control Panel

Installing Printer Software in Windows

and start windows firewall, and set this option unactivated. For

other operating system, refer to its on-line guide.

After the installation is finished, a window appears asking

you to print a test page and to register yourself as a user

of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from

Samsung. If you so desire, select the corresponding

checkbox(es) and click

Finish

Otherwise, just click

Finish

NOTE

: After setup is complete, if your printer driver doesn’t

work properly, reinstall the printer driver. See “Reinstalling

Printer Software” on page 11.

Custom Installation

You can choose individual components to install and set a

specific IP address.

Make sure that the printer is connected to your network

and powered on. For details about connecting to the

network, see the supplied printer’s User’s Guide.

Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.

The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation

window appears.

If the installation window does not appear, click

Start

and

then

Run

. Type

X:\Setup.exe

, replacing “

” with the

letter which represents your drive and click

If you use Windows vista, Windows 7 and Windows Server

2008 R2, click

Start

→

All programs

→

Accessories

→

Run

, and type

X:\Setup.exe

If the

AutoPlay

window appears in Windows vista,

Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, click

Run

Setup.exe

Install or run program

field, and click

Continue

in the

User Account Control

window.

Installing Printer Software in Windows

Click

• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.

Select

Custom installation

. Click

The list of printers available on the network appears.

Select the printer you want to install from the list and then

click

•

If you click the

Advanced

button, you can search a printer

with the

SNMP Community name

. Default name is

‘public’

• If you do not see your printer on the list, click

Update

refresh the list, or select

Add TCP/IP Port

to add your

printer to the network. To add the printer to the

network, enter the port name and the IP address for the

printer.

To verify your printer’s IP address or the MAC address,

print a Network Configuration page.

• To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select

Shared Printer [UNC]

and enter the shared name

manually or find a shared printer by clicking the

Browse

button.

NOTE

: If you cannot find your machine in network, please turn

off the firewall and click

Update

For Windows operating system, click

Start

→

Control Panel

and start windows firewall, and set this option unactivated. For

other operating system, refer to its on-line guide.

TIP

: If you want to set a specific IP address on a specific

network printer, click the

Set IP Address

button. The Set IP

Address window appears. Do as follows:

a. Select a printer to be set with a specific IP address from the

list.

b. Configure an IP address, subnet mask, and gateway for the

printer manually and click

Configure

to set the specific IP

address for the network printer.

c. Click

Installing Printer Software in Windows

Select the components to be installed. After selecting the

components, the following window appears. You can also

change the printer name, set the printer to be shared on

the network, set the printer as the default printer, and

change the port name of each printer. Click

To install this software on a server, select the

Setting up

this printer on a server

checkbox.

After the installation is finished, a window appears asking

you to print a test page and to register yourself as a user

of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from

Samsung. If you so desire, select the corresponding

checkbox(es) and click

Finish

Otherwise, just click

Finish

NOTE

: After setup is complete, if your printer driver doesn’t

work properly, reinstall the printer driver. See “Reinstalling

Printer Software” on page 11.

Reinstalling Printer Software

You can reinstall the software if installation fails.

Start Windows.

From the

Start

menu select

Programs

All Programs

→

your printer driver name

→

Maintenance

Select

Repair

and click

The list of printers available on the network appears.

Select the printer you want to install from the list and then

click

• If you do not see your printer on the list, click

Update

refresh the list, or select

Add TCP/IP Port

to add your

printer to the network. To add the printer to the

network, enter the port name and the IP address for the

printer.

• To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select

Shared Printer [UNC]

and enter the shared name

manually or find a shared printer by clicking the

Browse

button.

You will see a component list so that you can reinstall any

item individually.

Installing Printer Software in Windows

NOTE

: If your printer is not already connected to the

computer, the following window will appear.

• After connecting the printer, click

• If you don’t want to connect the printer at this time, click

, and

on the following screen. Then the installation

will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the

installation.

• The reinstallation window that appears in this User’s

Guide may differ depending on the printer and

interface in use.

Select the components you want to reinstall and click

If you installed the printer software for local printing

and

you select

your printer driver name

, the window

asking you to print a test page appears. Do as follows:

a. To print a test page, select the check box and click

b. If the test page prints out correctly, click

Yes

If it doesn’t, click

to reprint it.

When the reinstallation is done, click

Finish

Removing Printer Software

Start Windows.

From the

Start

menu select

Programs

All Programs

→

your printer driver name

→

Maintenance

Select

Remove

and click

You will see a component list so that you can remove any

item individually.

Select the components you want to remove and then click

When your computer asks you to confirm your selection,

click

Yes

The selected driver and all of its components are removed

from your computer.

After the software is removed, click

Finish

Basic Printing

2Basic Printing

This chapter explains the printing options and common printing

tasks in Windows.

This chapter includes:

• Printing a Document

• Printing to a file (PRN)

•Printer Settings

- Layout Tab

- Paper Tab

- Graphics Tab

- Extras Tab

- About Tab

- Printer Tab

- Using a Favorite Setting

- Using Help

Printing a Document

OTES

• Your printer driver

Properties

window that appears in this

User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.

However the composition of the printer properties window is

similar.

• Check the Operating System(s) that are compatible

with your printer. Please refer to the OS Compatibility

section of Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s

Guide.

• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can

check the supplied CD-ROM.

• When you select an option in printer properties, you may see

an exclamationmark or mark. An exclamation mark

means you can select that certain option but it is not

recommended, and mark means you cannot select that

option due to the machine’s setting or environment.

The following procedure describes the general steps required

for printing from various Windows applications. The exact steps

for printing a document may vary depending on the application

program you are using. Refer to the User’s Guide of your

software application for the exact printing procedure.

Open the document you want to print.

Select

from the

File

menu. The Print window is

displayed. It may look slightly different depending on your

application.

The basic print settings are selected within the Print

window. These settings include the number of copies and

print range.

Select

your printer driver

from the

Name

drop-down

list.

To take advantage of the printer features provided by your

printer driver, click

Properties

Preferences

in the

application’s Print window. For details, see “Printer

Settings” on page 14.

If you see

Setup

Printer

, or

Options

in your Print

window, click it instead. Then click

Properties

on the next

screen.

Click

to close the printer properties window.

To start the print job, click

in the Print

window.

Make sure that your

printer is selected.

Basic Printing

Printing to a file (PRN)

You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file for your

purpose.

To create a file:

Check the

Print to file

box at the

window.

Select the folder and assign a name of the file and then

click OK.

Printer Settings

You can use the printer properties window, which allows you to

access all of the printer options you need when using your

printer. When the printer properties are displayed, you can

review and change the settings needed for your print job.

Your printer properties window may differ, depending on your

operating system. This Software User’s Guide shows the

Properties window for Windows XP.

Your printer driver

Properties

window that appears in this

User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.

If you access printer properties through the Printers folder, you

can view additional Windows-based tabs (refer to your

Windows User’s Guide) and the Printer tab (see “Printer Tab” on

page 18).

OTES

• Most Windows applications will override settings you specify

in the printer driver. Change all print settings available in the

software application first, and change any remaining settings

using the printer driver.

• The settings you change remain in effect only while you are

using the current program.

To make your changes

permanent

, make them in the Printers folder.

• The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other

Windows OS, refer to the corresponding Windows User's

Guide or online help.

1. Click the Windows

Start

button.

2. Select

Printers and Faxes

3. Select your printer driver icon.

4. Right-click on the printer driver icon and select

Printing Preferences

5. Change the settings on each tab, click OK.

Basic Printing

Layout Tab

The

Layout

tab provides options to adjust how the document

appears on the printed page. The

Layout Options

includes

Multiple Pages per Side

Poster Printing

and

Booklet

Printing

. See “Printing a Document” on page 13 for more

information on accessing printer properties.

Paper Orientation

allows you to select the direction in which

information is printed on a page.

•

Portrait

prints across the width of the page, letter style.

•

Landscape

prints across the length of the page, spreadsheet

style.

•

Rotate

allows you to rotate the page the selected degrees.

Layout Options

allows you to select advanced printing options.

You can choose

Multiple Pages per Side

and

Poster Printing

•

For details, see

“Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper

(N-Up Printing)” on page 19.

•

For details, see

“Printing Posters” on page 20.

•

For details, see

“Printing Booklets” on page 20.

Double-sided Printing

allows you to print on both sides of

paper.

If this option does not appear, your printer does

not have this feature.

•

For details, see

“Printing on Both Sides of Paper” on page 21.

Landscape

Portrait

Paper Tab

Use the following options to set the basic paper handling

specifications when you access the printer properties. See

“Printing a Document” on page 13 for more information on

accessing printer properties.

Click the

Paper

tab to access various paper properties.

Copies

allows you to choose the number of copies to be printed.

You can select 1 to 999 copies.

Paper Options

Size

allows you to set the size of paper you loaded in the tray.

If the required size is not listed in the

Size

box, click

Custom

When the

Custom Paper Setting

window appears, set the paper

size and click

. The setting appears in the list so that you can

select it.

Source

Make sure that

Source

is set to the corresponding paper tray.

Use

Manual Feeder

when printing on special materials like

envelopes and transparencies. You have to load one sheet at a

time into the Manual Tray or Multi-Purpose Tray.

If the paper source is set to

Auto Selection

, the printer

automatically picks up print material in the following tray order:

Manual Tray or Multi-Purpose Tray, Tray n.

Type

Set

Type

to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from

which you want to print. This will let you get the best quality

printout. If not, print quality may not be acheived as you want.

Thick Paper

: 24 lb to 28 lb (90~105 g/m

) thick paper.

Thin Paper

: 16 lb to 19 lb (60~70 g/m

) thin paper.

Cotton

: 20 lb to 24 lb (75~90 g/m

) cotton paper such as Gilbert

25 % and Gilbert 100 %.

Basic Printing

Plain Paper

: Normal plain paper. Select this type if your printer is

monochrome and printing on the 16 lb (60 g/m

) cotton paper.

Recycled Paper

: 20 lb to 24 lb (75~90 g/m

) recycled paper.

Color Paper

: 20 lb to 24 lb (75~90 g/m

) color-backgrounded

paper.

Archive Paper

: If you need to keep print-out for a long period

time such as archives, select this option.

First Page

This property allows you to print the first page using a different

paper type from the rest of the document. You can select the

paper source for the first page.

For example, load thick stock for the first page into the Multi-

purpose Tray, and plain paper into Tray n. Then, select

Tray n

the

Source

option and

Multi-Purpose Tray

in the

First Page

option.

If this option does not appear, your printer does

not have this feature.

Scaling Printing

allows you to automatically or manually scale

your print job on a page. You can choose from

None

Reduce/

Enlarge

, and

Fit to Page

•

For details, see

“Printing a Reduced or Enlarged Document” on

page 21.

•

For details, see

“Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper

Size” on page 21.

Graphics Tab

Use the following Graphic options to adjust the print quality for

your specific printing needs. See “Printing a Document” on

page 13 for more information on accessing printer properties.

Click the

Graphic

tab to display the properties shown below.

Resolution

The Resolution options you can select may vary

depending on your printer model.

The higher the setting,

the sharper the clarity of printed characters and graphics. The

higher setting also may increase the time it takes to print a

document.

Toner Save Mode

Selecting this option extends the life of your toner cartridge and

reduces your cost per page without a significant reduction in print

quality.

Some printers do not support this feature.

•

: Select this option to allow the printer to use less toner on

each page.

•

Off

: If you don’t need to save toner when printing a document,

select this option.

Basic Printing

Advanced Options

You can set advanced settings by clicking the

Advanced

Options

button.

•

TrueType Options

This option determines what the driver

tells the printer about how to image the text in your document.

Select the appropriate setting according to the status of your

document.

Download as Outline

: When this option is selected, the

driver will download any TrueType fonts that are used in your

document not already stored (resident) on your printer. If,

after printing a document, you find that the fonts did not print

correctly, choose Download as bit image and resubmit your

print job. The Download as bit image setting is often useful

when printing Adobe.

This feature is available only

when you use the PCL printer driver.

Download as Bitmap

: When this option is selected, the

driver will download the font data as bitmap images.

Documents with complicated fonts, such as Korean or

Chinese, or various other fonts, will print faster in this setting.

Print as Graphics

When this option is selected, the driver

will download any fonts as graphics. When printing documents

with high graphic content and relatively few TrueType fonts,

printing performance (speed) may be enhanced in this

setting.

•

Print All Text To Black

When the

Print All Text To

Black

option

is checked, all text in your document prints solid

black, regardless of the color it appears on the screen.

Extras Tab

You can select output options for your document. See “Printing

a Document” on page 13 for more information about accessing

the printer properties.

Click the

Extras

tab to access the following feature:

Watermark

You can create a background text image to be printed on each

page of your document.

For details, see

“Using Watermarks” on

page 22.

Overlay

Overlays are often used to take the place of preprinted forms and

letterhead paper.

For details, see

“Using Overlays” on page 23.

Output Options

•

Print Subset

: You can set the sequence in which the pages

print. Select the print order from the drop-down list.

Normal (1,2,3)

: Your printer prints all pages from the first

page to the last page.

Reverse All Pages (3,2,1)

: Your printer prints all pages

from the last page to the first page.

Print Odd Pages

: Your printer prints only the odd numbered

pages of the document.

Print Even Pages

: Your printer prints only the even

numbered pages of the document.

•

Staple

: Do the stapling on the printouts.

•

Request Offset

: If you want the printouts to be sorted the

same way as the original, the machine places printout sets

slightly offset from one another.

More Options

•

Information Page

: Select Information Page to print a cover

sheet containing the printer name, the network user ID, job

name before printing the document. When several users send a

print job to the printer, this option allows you to easily find your

documents in the output tray.

Basic Printing

•

Use Printer Fonts

: When Use Printer Fonts is checked, the

printer uses the fonts that are stored in its memory (resident

fonts) to print your document, rather than downloading the

fonts used in your document. Because downloading fonts takes

time, selecting this option can speed up your printing time.

When using Printer fonts, the printer will try to match the fonts

used in your document to those stored in its memory. If,

however, you use fonts in your document that are very different

from those resident in the printer, your printed output will

appear very different from what it looks like on the screen.

This feature is available only when you use the PCL

printer driver.

•

Save as Form for Overlay

: Select Save as Form for Overlay to

save the document as a form file (C:\FORMOVER\*.FOM). Once

this option is selected, the printer driver requires the file name

and the destination path each time you print. If you want to

preset the file name and specify the path, click on the button in

the Output to area, and type the file name and specify the path.

This feature is available only when you use the PCL

printer driver.

Job Setting

Job Setting dialog allows you to select how to print or save the

printing file by using the HDD.

Some printers do not support

this feature.

Using Onscreen Help File

• For more information about

Job Setting

, click at the

top right corner of the window. The

Job Setting

Help

window opens and allows you to view onscreen help supplied

on the

Job Setting

About Tab

Use the

About

tab to display the copyright notice and the

version number of the driver. If you have an Internet browser,

you can connect to the Internet by clicking on the web site icon.

See “Printing a Document” on page 13 for more information

about accessing printer properties.

Printer Tab

If you access printer properties through the

Printers

folder,

you can view the

Printer

tab. You can set the printer

configuration.

The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other Windows

OS, refer to the corresponding Windows User's Guide or online

help.

Click the Windows

Start

menu.

Select

Printers and Faxes

Select

your printer driver

icon.

Right-click on the printer driver icon and select

Properties

Click the

Printer

tab and set the options.

Using a Favorite Setting

The

Favorites

option, which is visible on each properties tab,

allows you to save the current properties settings for future

use.

To save a

Favorites

item:

Change the settings as needed on each tab.

Enter a name for the item in the

Favorites

input box.

Click

Save

When you save

Favorites

, all current driver settings are

saved.

To use a saved setting, select the item from the

Favorites

drop

down list. The printer is now set to print according to the

Favorites setting you selected.

To delete a Favorites item, select it from the list and click

Delete

You can also restore the printer driver’s default settings by

selecting

Printer Default

from the list.

Using Help

Your printer has a help screen that can be activated by clicking

the

Help

button in the printer properties window. These help

screens give detailed information about the printer features

provided by the printer driver.

You can also click from the upper right corner of the window,

and then click on any setting.

Advanced Printing

3Advanced Printing

This chapter explains printing options and advanced printing

tasks.

OTE

• Your printer driver

Properties

window that appears in this

User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.

However the composition of the printer properties window is

similar.

• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can

check the supplied CD-ROM.

This chapter includes:

• Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper (N-Up

Printing)

•Printing Posters

•Printing Booklets

• Printing on Both Sides of Paper

• Printing a Reduced or Enlarged Document

• Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper Size

• Using Watermarks

• Using Overlays

Printing Multiple Pages on One

Sheet of Paper (N-Up Printing)

You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet

of paper. To print more than one page per sheet, the pages will

be reduced in size and arranged in the order you specify. You

can print up to 16 pages on one sheet.

To change the print settings from your software

application, access printer properties. See “Printing a

Document” on page 13.

From the

Layout

tab, choose

Multiple Pages per Side

the

Layout Type

drop-down list.

Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet

(1, 2, 4, 6, 9, or 16) in the

Pages per Side

drop-down

list.

Select the page order from the

Page Order

drop-down

list, if necessary.

Check

Print Page Border

to print a border around each

page on the sheet.

Click the

Paper

tab, select the paper source, size, and

type.

Click

and print the document.

1 2

3 4

Advanced Printing

Printing Posters

This feature allows you to print a single-page document onto 4,

9, or 16 sheets of paper, for the purpose of pasting the sheets

together to form one poster-size document.

To change the print settings from your software

application, access printer properties. See “Printing a

Document” on page 13.

Click the

Layout

tab, select

Poster Printing

in the

Layout Type

drop-down list.

Configure the poster option:

You can select the page layout from

Poster<2x2>

Poster<3x3>

Poster<4x4>

Custom

. If you select

Poster<2x2>

, the output will be automatically stretched

to cover 4 physical pages. If the option is set to Custom,

you can enlarge the original from 150% to 400%.

Depending on the level of the enlargement, the page

layout is automatically adjusted to

Poster<2x2>

Poster<3x3>

Poster<4x4>

Specify an overlap in millimeters or inches to make it

easier to pasting the sheets together.

Click the

Paper

tab, select the paper source, size, and

type.

Click

and print the document. You can complete the

poster by pasting the sheets together.

0.15 inches

Printing Booklets

This printer feature allows you to print your document on both

sides of the paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can

be folded in half after printing to produce a booklet.

To change the print settings from your software

application, access the printer properties. See “Printing a

Document” on page 13.

From the

Layout

tab, choose

Booklet Printing

from the

Layout Type

drop-down list.

OTE

: The

Booklet Printing

option is not available for all

paper sizes. In order to find out the available paper size for

this feature, select the paper size in the

Size

option on the

Paper

tab, then check if the

Booklet Printing

in a

Layout

Type

drop-down list on the

Layout

tab is activated.

Click the

Paper

tab, and select the paper source, size, and

type.

Click

and print the document.

After printing, fold and staple the pages.

Advanced Printing

Printing on Both Sides of Paper

You can print on both sides of a sheet of paper. Before printing,

decide how you want your document oriented.

The options are:

•

Printer Setting

, if you select this option, this feature is

determined by the setting you’ve made on the control

panel of the printer.

If this option does not appear,

your printer does not have this feature.

•

None

•

Long Edge

, which is the conventional layout used in

book binding.

•

Short Edge

, which is the type often used with calendars.

•

Reverse Duplex Printing

, allows you to select general

print order compare to duplex print order.

If this option

does not appear, your printer does not have this

feature.

OTE

: Do not print on both sides of labels, transparencies,

envelopes, or thick paper. Paper jamming and damage to the

printer may result.

To change the print settings from your software

application, access printer properties. “Printing a

Document” on page 13.

From the

Layout

tab, select the paper orientation.

From the

Double-sided Printing

section, select the

binding option you want.

Click the

Paper

tab and select the paper source, size, and

type.

Click

and print the document.

OTE

: If your printer does not have a duplex unit, you should

complete the printing job manually. The printer prints every

other page of the document first. After printing the first side of

your job, the Printing Tip window appears. Follow the on-

screen instructions to complete the printing job.

Long Edge

Short Edge

Printing a Reduced or Enlarged

Document

You can change the size of a page’s content to appear larger or

smaller on the printed page.

To change the print settings from your software

application, access printer properties. See “Printing a

Document” on page 13.

From the

Paper

tab, select

Reduce/Enlarge

in the

Printing Type

drop-down list.

Enter the scaling rate in the

Percentage

input box.

You can also click the or button.

Select the paper source, size, and type in

Paper Options

Click

and print the document.

Fitting Your Document to a

Selected Paper Size

This printer feature allows you to scale your print job to any

selected paper size regardless of the digital document size. This

can be useful when you want to check fine details on a small

document.

To change the print settings from your software

application, access printer properties. See “Printing a

Document” on page 13.

From the

Paper

tab, select

Fit to Page

in the

Printing

Type

drop-down list.

Select the correct size from the

Output size

drop-down

list.

Select the paper source, size, and type in

Paper Options

Click

and print the document.

Advanced Printing

Using Watermarks

The Watermark option allows you to print text over an existing

document. For example, you may want to have large gray

letters reading “DRAFT” or “CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally

across the first page or all pages of a document.

There are several predefined watermarks that come with the

printer, and they can be modified, or you can add new ones to

the list.

Using an Existing Watermark

To change the print settings from your software

application, access printer properties. See “Printing a

Document” on page 13.

Click the

Extras

tab, and select the desired watermark

from the

Watermark

drop-down list. You will see the

selected watermark in the preview image.

Click

and start printing.

OTE

: The preview image shows how the page will look when

it is printed.

Creating a Watermark

To change the print settings from your software

application, access printer properties. See “Printing a

Document” on page 13.

Click the

Extras

tab, and click the

Edit

button in the

Watermark

section. The

Edit Watermark

window

appears.

Enter a text message in the

Watermark Message

box.

You can enter up to 40 characters. The message displays

in the preview window.

When the

First Page Only

box is checked, the watermark

prints on the first page only.

Select watermark options.

You can select the font name, style, size, or grayscale level

from the

Font Attributes

section and set the angle of the

watermark from the

Message Angle

section.

Click

Add

to add a new watermark to the list.

When you have finished editing, click

and start

printing.

To stop printing the watermark, select

(No Watermark)

from

the

Watermark

drop-down list.

Editing a Watermark

To change the print settings from your software

application, access printer properties. See “Printing a

Document” on page 13.

Click the

Extras

tab and click the

Edit

button in the

Watermark

section. The

Edit Watermark

window

appears.

Select the watermark you want to edit from the

Current

Watermarks

list and change the watermark message and

options.

Click

Update

to save the changes.

Click

until you exit the Print window.

Deleting a Watermark

To change the print settings from your software

application, access printer properties. See “Printing a

Document” on page 13.

From the

Extras

tab, click the

Edit

button in the

Watermark section. The

Edit Watermark

window

appears.

Select the watermark you want to delete from the

Current

Watermarks

list and click

Delete

Click

until you exit the Print window.

Advanced Printing

Using Overlays

What is an Overlay?

An overlay is text and/or images stored in the computer hard

disk drive (HDD) as a special file format that can be printed on

any document. Overlays are often used to take the place of

preprinted forms and letterhead paper. Rather than using

preprinted letterhead, you can create an overlay containing the

exact same information that is currently on your letterhead. To

print a letter with your company’s letterhead, you do not need

to load preprinted letterhead paper in the printer. You need only

tell the printer to print the letterhead overlay on your

document.

Creating a New Page Overlay

To use a page overlay, you must create a new page overlay

containing your logo or image.

Create or open a document containing text or an image for

use in a new page overlay. Position the items exactly as

you wish them to appear when printed as an overlay.

To save the document as an overlay, access printer

properties. See “Printing a Document” on page 13.

Click the

Extras

tab, and click

Edit

button in the

Overlay

section.

In the Edit Overlay window, click

Create Overlay

In the Create Overlay window, type a name of up to eight

characters in the

File name

box. Select the destination

path, if necessary. (The default is C:\Formover).

Click

Save

. The name appears on the

Overlay List

box.

Click

Yes

to finish creating.

The file is not printed. Instead it is stored on your

computer hard disk drive.

OTE

: The overlay document size must be the same as the

documents you print with the overlay. Do not create an overlay

with a watermark.

WORLD BEST

Dear ABC

Regards

WORLD BEST

Using a Page Overlay

After an overlay has been created, it is ready to be printed with

your document. To print an overlay with a document:

Create or open the document you want to print.

To change the print settings from your software

application, access printer properties. See “Printing a

Document” on page 13.

Click the

Extras

tab.

Select the desired overlay from the

Overlay

drop-down

list box.

If the overlay file you want does not appear in the

Overlay

list, click

Edit

button and

Load Overlay

, and

select the overlay file.

If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an

external source, you can also load the file when you access

the

Load Overlay

window.

After you select the file, click

Open

. The file appears in the

Overlay List

box and is available for printing. Select the

overlay from the

Overlay List

box.

If necessary, click

Confirm Page Overlay When

Printing

. If this box is checked, a message window

appears each time you submit a document for printing,

asking you to confirm your wish to print an overlay on your

document.

If this box is not checked and an overlay has been

selected, the overlay automatically prints with your

document.

Click

Yes

until printing begins.

The selected overlay downloads with your print job and

prints on your document.

OTE

: The resolution of the overlay document must be the

same as that of the document you will print with the overlay.

Deleting a Page Overlay

You can delete page overlays that you no longer use.

In the printer properties window, click the

Extras

tab.

Click the

Edit

button in the

Overlay

section.

Select the overlay you want to delete from the

Overlay

List

box.

Click

Delete Overlay

When a confirming message window appears, click

Yes

Click

until you exit the Print window.

Using Windows PostScript Driver

4Using Windows

PostScript Driver

If you want to use the PostScript driver provided with your

system CD-ROM to print a document.

PPDs, in combination with the PostScript driver, access printer

features and allow the computer to communicate with the

printer. An installation program for the PPDs is provided on the

supplied software CD-ROM.

Printer Settings

You can use the printer properties window, which allows you to

access all of the printer options you need when using your

printer. When the printer properties are displayed, you can

review and change the settings needed for your print job.

Your printer properties window may differ, depending on your

operating system. This Software User’s Guide shows the

Properties window for Windows XP.

Your printer driver

Properties

window that appears in this

User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.

OTES

• Most Windows applications will override settings you specify

in the printer driver. Change all print settings available in the

software application first, and change any remaining settings

using the printer driver.

• The settings you change remain in effect only while you are

using the current program.

To make your changes

permanent

, make them in the Printers folder.

• The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other

Windows OS, refer to the corresponding Windows User's

Guide or online help.

1. Click the Windows

Start

button.

2. Select Printers and Faxes.

3. Select your printer driver icon.

4. Right-click on the printer driver icon and select

Printing Preferences.

5. Change the settings on each tab, click OK.

Advanced

You can use advanced settings by clicking the

Advanced

button.

•

Paper/Output

this option allows you to select the size of the

paper loaded in the tray.

•

Graphic

this option allows you to adjust the print quality for

your specific printing needs.

•

Document Options

this options allow you to set the PostScript

options or printer features.

Using Help

You can click from the upper right corner of the window, and

then click on any setting.

Using Direct Printing Utility

5Using Direct Printing

Utility

This chapter explains how to use Direct Printing Utility to print

PDF files without having to open the files.

AUTION

• You can not print PDF files that are restricted to print.

Deactivate the printing restriction feature, and retry

printing.

• You can not print PDF files that are restricted by a password.

Deactivate the password feature, and retry printing.

• Depending on how a PDF file was created, it may not be able

to be printed using the

Direct Printing Utility

program.

• Depending on the installation of Hard Disk on your printer;

PDF files can or can not be printed using the

Direct

Printing Utility

program.

•The

Direct Printing Utility

program supports PDF version

1.4 and below. For a higher version, you must open the file

to print it.

Overview Direct Printing Utility

Direct Printing Utility is a program that sends a PDF file directly

to your printer without having to open the file. It sends data

through the Windows spooler using the port of the printer

driver. It only supports PDF format.

To installing this program, you should select

Custom

installation

and put a check mark in this program when you

install the printer driver.

Printing

There are several ways you can print using Direct Printing

Utility.

From the Direct Printing Utility

window

From the

Start

menu select

Programs

All Programs

→

Direct Printing Utility

→

Direct Printing Utility

Or, double-click the Direct Printing Utility shortcut icon on

your desk top.

The Direct Printing Utility window opens.

Select the printer you will use in the Select Printer section

and click

Browse

Select the PDF file you will print and click

Open

The PDF file is added in the Select Files section.

Customize the printer settings for your needs. See the

next column.

Click

The selected PDF file is sent to the printer.

Using the shortcut icon

Select the PDF file you will print and by dragging drop it to

the Direct Printing Utility shortcut icon on your desk top.

The selected PDF file is sent to the default printer.

OTE

If the default printer does not support Direct Printing Utility,

the message window alerting you to select the appropriate printer

opens. Select the appropriate printer in the Select Printer section.

Customize the printer settings for your needs.

Click

The selected PDF file is sent to the printer.

Using the right-click menu

Right-click on the PDF file you will print and select

Direct

Printing

The Direct Printing Utility window opens with the PDF file is

added.

Select the printer you will use.

Customize the printer settings for your needs. See the

below part.

Click

The selected PDF file is sent to the printer.

Sharing the Printer Locally

6Sharing the Printer

Locally

You can connect the printer directly to a selected computer,

which is called “host computer,” on the network.

The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other Windows

OS, refer to the corresponding Windows User's Guide or online

help.

OTES

• Check the Operating System(s) that are compatible with

your printer. Please refer to the OS Compatibility section of

Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s Guide.

• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can

check the supplied CD-ROM.

Setting Up a Host Computer

Start Windows.

From the

Start

menu select

Printers and Faxes

Double-click

your printer driver icon

From the

Printer

menu, select

Sharing

Check the

Share this printer

box.

Fill in the

Shared Name

field, and then click

Setting Up a Client Computer

Right-click the Windows

Start

button and select

Explore

Select

My Network Places

and then right-click

for Computers

Fill in the IP address of host computer in

Computer name

field, and click

. (In case host computer requires

User name

and

Password

, fill in User ID and password

of host computer account.)

Double-click

Printers and Faxes

Right-click printer driver icon, select

Connect

Click

Yes

, if the installation confirm message appears.

Scanning

7Scanning

Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into

digital files on your computer. Then you can fax or e-mail the

files, display them on your web site or use them to create

projects that you can print using Samsung SmarThru software

or the WIA driver.

This chapter includes:

• Scanning Using Samsung SmarThru Office

• Scanning Process with TWAIN-enabled Software

• Scanning Using the WIA Driver

OTES

• Check the Operating System(s) that are compatible

with your printer. Please refer to the OS Compatibility

section of Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s

Guide.

• You can check your printer name in the supplied CD-

ROM.

• The maximum resolution that can be achieved

depends upon various factors, including computer

speed, available disk space, memory, the size of the

image being scanned, and bit depth settings. Thus,

depending on your system and what you are scanning,

you may not be able to scan at certain resolutions,

especially using enhanced dpi.

Scanning Using Samsung

SmarThru Office

Samsung

SmarThru Office

is the accompanying software for

your machine. You can use

SmarThru Office

to scan images

or documents from local or network scanners.

Using Samsung SmarThru Office

Follow these steps to start scanning using the

SmarThru

Office

Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on

and properly connected to each other.

Place your photograph or page on the document glass or

DADF (or ADF).

Once you have installed Samsung

SmarThru Office

, you

will see the

SmarThru Office

icon on your desktop.

Double-click the

SmarThru Office

icon.

The

SmarThru Office

window opens.

•

Tool bar

: Allows you to use shortcut icons which activate

the certain functions such as

Scan

, etc.

Double-click this icon.

Tool bar

Working area

Send to bar

Scanning

•Working area

SmarThru Desktop

: Created within the standard

Windows folder My Documents.

Sort on Disk

: Files of the folders which are not

indexed will not be displayed in the

Sort on Disk

section. Sort type are Date, File Types, Latest Used.

To add a folder for indexing, press

Edit

→

Preferences

→

Index

It may take longer time to show the added file folders

according to the computer performance and the

number of added file folders.

OTES

• To do indexing and searching the PDF format file, you must

install Adobe Acrobat Reader 7.0.5 or higher.

• You can use indexing and searching functions using

SmarThru Office

supported by Microsoft Indexing Service.

Windows Folders

: Allow user to navigate through all

the user’s files and folders.

- The right panel: Reflects the content of a selected

folder.

•

Send to bar:

Run the corresponding application directly.

Drag and drop selected files to the appropriate

application button.

Send by E-mail

: To send documents by E-mail while

working within the

SmarThru Office

To send scanned images or documents by e-mail, you

must have a mail client program, like Outlook Express,

which has been set up with your e-mail account.

Send by FTP

: To upload a document file to server

while working within the

SmarThru Office

Send by Fax

: To send documents by Local or Network

fax machine while working within the

SmarThru

Office

Click

Scan

on the tool bar of

SmarThru Office

window.

Adjust the scan settings.

Click to start scanning.

OTES

• In Windows XP operating system, you can use

SmarThru

Office

launcher, which is on the right end of taskbar, to open

the

Scan Setting

window easily.

• In other operating systems beside Windows XP, click the

SmarThru icon in the tray area of the windows taskbar

to activate the

SmarThru Office

launcher.

Scan Setting

lets you use the following services:

•

Select Scanner:

Select the Local or Network scanner.

- Local Scan: After scanning with parallel port or USB

port, you can store the scanned output in image or

document file.

- Network Scan: After scanning via network, you can

store the scanned output in JPEG, TIFF, or pdf file.

To use network scanner, your computer should install

the

Samsung Network Scan Manager

and register

the scanner within that program. Refer to Scanning

chapter in user's guide.

•

Scan Settings

: Allows you to customize settings for

Image type, Resolution, Scan Size, Paper Source.

•

Scan To

: Allows you to customize settings for File Name,

File Format, OCR Language.

To start scanning, click

Scan

OTE

: If you want to cancel the scan job, click

Cancel

Uninstalling Samsung SmarThru Office

OTE

: Before beginning uninstallation, ensure that all

applications are closed on your computer.

From the

Start

menu, select

Programs

Select

SmarThru Office

, and then select

Uninstall

SmarThru Office

When your computer asks you to confirm, read the

statement and click

Click

Finish

Scanning

Using Onscreen Help File

For more information about SmarThru, click at the top right

corner of the window. The SmarThru Help window opens and

allows you to view onscreen help supplied on the SmarThru

program.

Scanning Process with TWAIN-

enabled Software

If you want to scan documents using other software, you will

need to use TWAIN-compliant software, such as Adobe

Photoshop. The first time you scan with your machine, select it

as your TWAIN source in the application you use.

The basic scanning process involves a number of steps:

Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on

and properly connected to each other.

Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF).

Place a single document face down on the document glass.

Open an application, such as Photoshop.

Open the TWAIN window and set the scan options.

Scan and save your scanned image.

OTE

: You need to follow the program’s instructions for

acquiring an image. Please refer to the user’s guide of the

application.

Scanning Using the WIA Driver

Your machine also supports the Windows Image Acquisition

(WIA) driver for scanning images. WIA is one of the standard

components provided by Microsoft

Windows

XP and works

with digital cameras and scanners. Unlike the TWAIN driver, the

WIA driver allows you to scan and easily manipulate images

without using additional software.

OTE

: The WIA driver works only on Windows XP/Server

2003/Vista/7 with USB port.

Windows XP/Server 2003

Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF).

Place a single document face down on the document

glass.

From the

Start

menu on your desktop window, select

Settings

Control Panel

, and then

Scanners and

Cameras

Double click

your scanner driver

icon. The Scanner and

Camera Wizard launches.

Choose your scanning preferences and click

Preview

see how your preferences affect the picture.

Click

Enter a picture name, and select a file format and

destination to save the picture.

Follow the on-screen instructions to edit the picture after it

is copied to your computer.

Windows Vista

Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF).

Place a single document face down on the document

glass.

Click

Start

→

Control Panel

→

Hardware and Sound

→

Scanners and Cameras

Click on

Scan a document or picture

. Then

Windows

Fax and Scan

application is opened automatically.

OTE

: To view scanners, user can click on

View scanners

and cameras

. If there is not

Scan a document or picture

open the MS paint program and click From

View scanners

and cameras

... on the

File

Click

Scan

and then scan driver is opened.

Choose your scanning preferences and click

Preview

see your preferences affect the picture.

Click

Scan

OTE

: If you want to cancel the scan job, press the Cancel

button on the Scanners and Cameras Wizard.

Scanning

Windows 7

Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF).

Place a single document face down on the document glass.

Click

Start

→

Control Panel

→

Hardware and Sound

→

Devices and Printers

Click right button of mouse on device driver icon in

Printers and Faxes

→

Start Scan

New Scan

application appears.

Choose your scanning preferences and click

Preview

see your preferences affect the picture.

Click

Scan

Using Smart Panel

8Using Smart Panel

Smart Panel is a program that monitors and informs you of the

status of the printer, and allows you to customize the printer’s

settings. If you are a Windows or Macintosh OS user, Smart

Panel is installed automatically when you install the printer

software. If you are a Linux OS user, download Smart Panel

from the Samsung website (www.samsung.com/printer) and

install.

OTES

• To use this program, you need:

- To check for Operating System(s) that are compatible with

your printer, refer to Printer Specifications in your Printer

User’s Guide.

- Mac OS X 10.3 or higher

- Linux. To check for Linux systems that are compatible with

your printer, refer to Printer Specifications in your Printer

User’s Guide.

- Internet Explorer version 5.0 or higher for flash animation

in HTML Help.

• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can

check the supplied CD-ROM.

Understanding Smart Panel

If an error occurs while printing, Smart Panel appears

automatically, showing the error.

You can also launch Smart Panel manually. Double-click the

Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (in Windows), or

Notification Area (in Linux). You can also click it on the status

bar (in Mac OS X).

Double-click this icon in Windows.

Click this icon in Mac OS X.

If you are a Windows user, from the

Start

menu, select

Programs

All Programs

→

your printer driver name

→

Smart Panel

OTES

• If you have already installed more than one Samsung

printer, first select the printer model you want in order to

use the corresponding Smart Panel. Right-click (in Windows

or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the Smart Panel icon and

select

your printer name

• The Smart Panel window and its contents shown in this

Software User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer or

Operating System in use.

The Smart Panel program displays the current status of the

printer, the level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge(s)

and various other information. You can also change settings.

Toner Level

You can view the level of toner remaining in the toner

cartridge(s). The printer and the number of toner cartridge(s)

shown in the above window may differ depending on the printer in

use. Any printers do not have this feature.

Buy Now

You can order replacement toner cartridge(s) online.

Troubleshooting Guide

You can view Help to solve problems.

Driver Setting (Only for Windows)

You can use the printer properties window, which allows you to

access all of the printer options you need for using your

printer.

For details,

See “Printer Settings” on page 14.

Click this icon in Linux.

Using Smart Panel

Opening the Troubleshooting

Guide

Using the troubleshooting guide, you can view solutions for

error status problems.

Right-click (in Windows or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the

Smart Panel icon and select

Troubleshooting Guide

Changing the Smart Panel

Program Settings

Right-click (in Windows or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the

Smart Panel icon and select

Options

Select the settings you want from the

Options

window.

Using Your Printer in Linux

9Using Your Printer in

Linux

You can use your machine in a Linux environment.

This chapter includes:

• Getting Started

• Installing the Unified Linux Driver

• Using the Unified Driver Configurator

• Configuring Printer Properties

• Printing a Document

• Scanning a Document

Getting Started

You need to download Linux software package from the

Samsung website (www.samsung.com/printer) to install the

printer softwares.

Samsung’s Unified Linux Driver package contains printer and

scanner drivers, providing the ability to print documents and

scan images. The package also delivers powerful applications

for configuring your machine and further processing of the

scanned documents.

After the driver is installed on your Linux system, the driver

package allows you to monitor a number of machine devices via

fast ECP parallel ports and USB simultaneously.

The acquired documents can then be edited, printed on the

same local or network machine devices, sent by e-mail,

uploaded to an FTP site, or transferred to an external OCR

system.

Installing the Unified Linux

Driver

Installing the Unified Linux Driver

Make sure that you connect your machine to your

computer. Turn both the computer and the machine on.

When the Administrator Login window appears, type in

root

in the Login field and enter the system password.

OTE

: You must log in as a super user (root) to install the

printer software. If you are not a super user, ask your system

administrator.

From the Samsung website, download and unpack the

Unified Linux Driver package to your computer.

Right click the

Unified Linux Driver

package and extract

the package.

Double click

cdroot

autorun

When the welcome screen appears, click

When the installation is complete, click

Finish

The installation program has added the Unified Driver

Configurator desktop icon and Samsung Unified Driver

group to the system menu for your convenience. If you

have any difficulties, consult the onscreen help that is

available through your system menu or can otherwise be

called from the driver package windows applications, such

Unified Driver Configurator

Image Manager

Installing the SmartPanel

Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer

and powered on.

Using Your Printer in Linux

When the

Administrator Login

window appears, type in

root in the Login field and enter the system password.

OTE

: You must log in as a super user (root) to install the

printer software. If you are not a super user, ask your system

administrator.

From the Samsung website, download the

Smart Panel

package to your computer.

Right click the Smart Panel package and extract the

package.

Double click

cdroot

Linux

smartpanel

install.sh

Uninstalling the Unified Linux Driver

Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer

and powered on.

When the

Administrator Login

window appears, type in

root

in the Login field and enter the system password.

OTE

: You must log in as a super user (root) to uninstall the

printer software. If you are not a super user, ask your system

administrator.

Click the icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the

Terminal screen appears, type in:

[root@localhost root]#cd /opt/Samsung/mfp/

uninstall/[root@localhost uninstall]#./uninstall.sh

Click

Uninstall

Click

Finish

Using Your Printer in Linux

Using the Unified Driver

Configurator

Unified Linux Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for

configuring Printer or MFP devices. Since an MFP device

combines the printer and scanner, the Unified Linux Driver

Configurator provides options logically grouped for printer and

scanner functions. There is also a special MFP port option

responsible for the regulation of access to an MFP printer and

scanner via a single I/O channel.

After installing the Unified Linux driver, the Unified Linux Driver

Configurator icon will automatically be created on your desktop.

Opening the Unified Driver

Configurator

Double-click

Unified Driver Configurator

on the

desktop.

You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select

Samsung Unified Driver

and then

Unified Driver

Configurator

Press each button on the Modules pane to switch to the

corresponding configuration window.

You can use the onscreen help by clicking

Help

After changing the configurations, click

Exit

to close the

Unified Driver Configurator.

Printers Configuration button

Scanners Configuration button

Ports Configuration button

Printers Configuration

Printers configuration has the two tabs:

Printers

and

Classes

Printers Tab

You can see the current system’s printer configuration by

clicking on the printer icon button on the left side of the Unified

Driver Configurator window.

You can use the following printer control buttons:

•

Refresh

: renews the available printers list.

•

Add Printer

: allows you to add a new printer.

•

Remove Printer

: removes the selected printer.

•

Set as Default

: sets the current printer as a default

printer.

•

Stop

Start

: stops/starts the printer.

•

Test

: allows you to print a test page to check if the

machine is working properly.

•

Properties

: allows you to view and change the printer

properties. For details, see page 37.

Shows all of the

installed printer.

Switches to Printer

configuration.

Shows the status,

model name and

URI of your printer.

Using Your Printer in Linux

Classes Tab

The Classes tab shows a list of available printer classes.

•

Refresh

: Renews the classes list.

•

Add Class... :

Allows you to add a new printer class.

•

Remove Class :

Removes the selected printer class.

Scanners Configuration

In this window, you can monitor the activity of scanner devices,

view a list of installed Samsung MFP devices, change device

properties, and scan images.

•

Properties...

: Allows you to change the scan properties

and scan a document. See page 38.

•

Drivers... :

Allows you to monitor the activity of the scan drivers.

Shows the status of the

class and the number of

printers in the class.

Shows all of the

printer classes.

Switches to

Scanners

configuration. Shows all of the

installed scanners.

Shows the vendor,

model name and type

of your scanner.

Ports Configuration

In this window, you can view the list of available ports, check

the status of each port and release a port that is stalled in busy

state when its owner is terminated for any reason.

•

Refresh

: Renews the available ports list.

•

Release port :

Releases the selected port.

Sharing Ports Between Printers and Scanners

Your machine may be connected to a host computer via the

parallel port or USB port. Since the MFP device contains more

than one device (printer and scanner), it is necessary to

organize proper access of “consumer” applications to these

devices via the single I/O port.

The Samsung Unified Linux Driver package provides an

appropriate port sharing mechanism that is used by Samsung

printer and scanner drivers. The drivers address their devices

via so-called MFP ports. The current status of any MFP port can

be viewed via the Ports Configuration. The port sharing

prevents you from accessing one functional block of the MFP

device, while another block is in use.

When you install a new MFP device onto your system, it is

strongly recommended you do this with the assistance of an

Unified Driver Configurator. In this case you will be asked to

choose I/O port for the new device. This choice will provide the

most suitable configuration for MFP’s functionality. For MFP

scanners I/O ports are being chosen by scanner drivers

automatically, so proper settings are applied by default.

Switches to

ports

configuration.

Shows the port type,

device connected to

the port and status

Shows all of the

available ports.

Using Your Printer in Linux

Configuring Printer Properties

Using the properties window provided by the Printers

configuration, you can change the various properties for your

machine as a printer.

Open the Unified Driver Configurator.

If necessary, switch to Printers configuration.

Select your machine on the available printers list and click

Properties

The Printer Properties window opens.

The following five tabs display at the top of the window:

•

General

: allows you to change the printer location and

name. The name entered in this tab displays on the

printer list in Printers configuration.

•

Connection

: allows you to view or select another port. If

you change the printer port from USB to parallel or vice

versa while in use, you must re-configure the printer port

in this tab.

•

Driver

: allows you to view or select another printer

driver. By clicking

Options

, you can set the default

device options.

•

Jobs

: shows the list of print jobs. Click

Cancel job

cancel the selected job and select the

Show completed

jobs

check box to see previous jobs on the job list.

•

Classes

: shows the class that your printer is in. Click

Add to Class

to add your printer to a specific class or

click

Remove from Class

to remove the printer from the

selected class.

Click

to apply the changes and close the Printer

Properties Window.

Printing a Document

Printing from Applications

There are a lot of Linux applications that you are allowed to

print from using Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS). You

can print on your machine from any such application.

From the application you are using, select

from the

File

menu.

Select

directly using

lpr

In the LPR GUI window, select the model name of your

machine from the Printer list and click

Properties

Change the printer and print job properties.

The following four tabs display at the top of the window.

•

General

- allows you to change the paper size, the paper

type, and the orientation of the documents, enables the

duplex feature, adds start and end banners, and changes

the number of pages per sheet.

Click.

Using Your Printer in Linux

•

Text

- allows you to specify the page margins and set the

text options, such as spacing or columns.

•

Graphics

- allows you to set image options that are used

when printing images/files, such as color options, image

size, or image position.

•

Device

: allows you to set the print resolution, paper

source, and destination.

Click

Apply

to apply the changes and close the Properties

window.

Click

in the LPR GUI window to start printing.

The Printing window appears, allowing you to monitor the

status of your print job.

To abort the current job, click

Cancel

Printing Files

You can print many different types of files on the Samsung

machine device using the standard CUPS way - directly from

the command line interface. The CUPS lpr utility allows you do

that. But the drivers package replaces the standard lpr tool by

a much more user-friendly LPR GUI program.

To print any document file:

Type

lpr <file_name>

from the Linux shell command

line and press

Enter

. The LPR GUI window appears.

When you type only

lpr

and press

Enter

, the Select file(s)

to print window appears first. Just select any files you

want to print and click

Open

In the LPR GUI window, select your printer from the list,

and change the printer and print job properties.

For details about the properties window, see page 37.

Click

to start printing.

Scanning a Document

You can scan a document using the Unified Driver Configurator

window.

Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on your

desktop.

Click the button to switch to Scanners Configuration.

Select the scanner on the list.

When you have only one MFP device and it is connected to

the computer and turned on, your scanner appears on the

list and is automatically selected.

If you have two or more scanners attached to your

computer, you can select any scanner to work at any time.

For example, while acquisition is in progress on the first

scanner, you may select the second scanner, set the device

options and start the image acquisition simultaneously.

Click

Properties

Load the document to be scanned

face up into the ADF

(Automatic Document Feeder) or face down on the

document glass.

Click

Preview

in the Scanner Properties window.

Click your

scanner.

Using Your Printer in Linux

The document is scanned and the image preview appears

in the Preview Pane.

Change the scan options in the Image Quality and Scan

Area sections.

•

Image Quality

: allows you to select the color

composition and the scan resolution for the image.

•

Scan Area

: allows you to select the page size. The

Advanced

button enables you to set the page size

manually.

If you want to use one of the preset scan option settings,

select from the Job Type drop-down list. For details about

the preset Job Type settings, see page 39.

You can restore the default setting for the scan options by

clicking

Default

When you have finished, click

Scan

to start scanning.

The status bar appears on the bottom left of the window to

show you the progress of the scan. To cancel scanning,

click

Cancel

The scanned image appears in the new Image Manager

tab.

Drag the pointer to

set the image area

to be scanned.

If you want to edit the scanned image, use the toolbar. For

further details about editing an image, see page 39.

When you are finished, click

Save

on the toolbar.

Select the file directory where you want to save the image

and enter the file name.

Click

Save

Adding Job Type Settings

You can save your scan option settings to retrieve for a later

scanning.

To save a new Job Type setting:

Change the options from the Scanner Properties window.

Click

Save As

Enter the name for your setting.

Click

Your setting is added to the Saved Settings drop-down list.

To save a Job Type setting for the next scan job:

Select the setting you want to use from the Job Type drop-

down list.

The next time you open the Scanner Properties window,

the saved setting is automatically selected for the scan

job.

To delete a Job Type setting:

Select the setting you want to delete from the Job Type

drop-down list.

Click

Delete

The setting is deleted from the list

Using the Image Manager

The Image Manager application provides you with menu

commands and tools to edit your scanned image.

Use these tools to

edit the image.

Using Your Printer in Linux

You can use the following tools to edit the image:

For further details about the Image Manager application, refer

to the onscreen help.

Tools Function

Saves the image.

Cancels your last action.

Restores the action you canceled.

Allows you to scroll through the image.

Crops the selected image area.

Zooms the image out.

Zooms the image in.

Allows you to scale the image size; you can

enter the size manually, or set the rate to

scale proportionally, vertically, or

horizontally.

Allows you to rotate the image; you can

select the number of degrees from the drop-

down list.

Allows you to flip the image vertically or

horizontally.

Allows you to adjust the brightness or

contrast of the image, or to invert the

image.

Shows the properties of the image.

Using Your Printer with a Macintosh

Using Your Printer with

a Macintosh

Your machine supports Macintosh systems with a built-in USB

interface or a 10/100 Base-TX network interface card. When

you print a file from a Macintosh computer, you can use the

PostScript driver by installing the PPD file.

OTE

Some printers do not support a network

interface. Make sure that your printer supports a

network interface by referring to Printer Specifications

in your Printer User’s Guide.

This chapter includes:

• Installing Software

• Uninstalling software

• Setting Up the Printer

•Printing

• Scanning

Installing Software

The CD-ROM that came with your printer provides you with the

PPD file that allows you to use the CUPS driver or Apple

LaserWriter driver

(only available when you use a printer

which supports the PostScript driver)

, for printing on a

Macintosh computer.

Also, it provides you with the Twain driver for scanning on a

Macintosh computer.

Make sure that you connect your printer to the computer.

Turn on your computer and printer.

Insert the CD-ROM which came with your printer into the

CD-ROM drive.

Double-click

CD-ROM icon

that appears on your

Macintosh desktop.

Double-click the

MAC_Installer

folder.

Double-click the

Installer OS X

icon.

Enter the password and click

The Samsung Installer window opens. Click

Continue

Select

Easy Install

and click

Install

Easy Install

recommended for most users. All components necessary

for printer operations will be installed.

If you select

Custom Install

, you can choose individual

components to install.

The message which warns all application will close on your

computer appears, Click

Continue

After the installation is finished, click

Quit

OTE

• If you have installed scan driver, click

Restart

• After the installation is finished, see “Setting Up the Printer”

on page 42

Uninstalling software

Uninstall is required if you are upgrading the software, or if

installation fails.

Make sure that you connect your printer to the computer.

Turn on your computer and printer.

Insert the CD-ROM which came with your printer into the

CD-ROM drive.

Double-click

CD-ROM icon

that appears on your

Macintosh desktop.

Double-click the

MAC_Installer

folder.

Double-click the

Installer OS X

icon.

Enter the password and click

The Samsung Installer window opens. Click

Continue

Select

Uninstall

and click

Uninstall

The message which warns all application will close on your

computer appears, Click

Continue

When the uninstallation is done, click

Quit

Using Your Printer with a Macintosh

Setting Up the Printer

Set up for your printer will be different depending on which

cable you use to connect the printer to your computer—the

network cable or the USB cable.

For a Network-connected

OTE

Some printers do not support a network

interface. Before connecting your printer, make sure

that your printer supports a network interface by

referring to Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s

Guide.

Follow the instructions on “When the uninstallation is

done, click Quit.” on page 41 to install the PPD file on your

computer.

Open the

Applications

folder

→

Utilities

, and

Setup Utility

•For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, open

System Preferences

from

the

Applications

folder, and click

Printer & Fax

Click

Add

on the

Printer List

•For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, press the “

” icon then a display

window will pop up.

For MAC OS 10.3, select the

Rendezvous

tab.

•For MAC OS 10.4, click

Default Browser

and find the

Bonjour

•For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, click

Default

and find the

Bonjour

The name of your machine appears on the list. Select

SEC000xxxxxxxxx

from the printer box, where the

xxxxxxxxx

varies depending on your machine.

For MAC OS 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly,

select

Samsung

Printer Model

and

your printer

name

Model Name

•For MAC OS 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly,

select

Samsung

Print Using

and

your printer name

Model

•For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, if Auto Select does not work

properly, select

Select a driver to use...

and

your

printer name

Print Using

Your machine appears on the Printer List and is set as the

default printer.

Click

Add

For a USB-connected

Follow the instructions on “When the uninstallation is

done, click Quit.” on page 41 to install the PPD file on your

computer.

Open the

Applications

folder

→

Utilities

, and

Setup Utility

•For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, open

System Preferences

from

the

Applications

folder, and click

Printer & Fax

Click

Add

on the

Printer List

•For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, press the “

” icon then a display

window will pop up.

For MAC OS 10.3, select the

USB

tab.

•For MAC OS 10.4, click

Default Browser

and find the

USB connection.

•For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, click

Default

and find the USB

connection.

Select

your printer name

For MAC OS 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly,

select

Samsung

Printer Model

and

your printer

name

Model Name

•For MAC OS 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly,

select

Samsung

Print Using

and

your printer name

Model

•For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, if Auto Select does not work

properly, select

Select a driver to use...

and

your

printer name

Print Using

Your machine appears on the Printer List and is set as the

default printer.

Click

Add

Using Your Printer with a Macintosh

Printing

OTES

• The Macintosh printer’s properties window that appears in

this User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.

However the composition of the printer properties window is

similar.

• You can check your printer name in the supplied CD-

ROM.

Printing a Document

When you print with a Macintosh, you need to check the printer

software setting in each application you use. Follow these steps

to print from a Macintosh.

Open a Macintosh application and select the file you want

to print.

Open the

File

menu and click

Page Setup

(

Document

Setup

in some applications).

Choose your paper size, orientation, scaling, and other

options and click

Open the

File

menu and click

Choose the number of copies you want and indicate which

pages you want to print.

Click

when you finish setting the options.

Mac OS 10.3

Make sure that your

printer is selected.

Changing Printer Settings

You can use advanced printing features when using your

printer.

From your Macintosh application, select

from the

File

menu. The printer name which appears in the printer properties

window may differ depending on the printer in use. Except for

the name, the composition of the printer properties window is

similar.

OTES

: The setting options may differ depending on printers

and Macintosh OS version.

Layout

The

Layout

tab provides options to adjust how the document

appears on the printed page. You can print multiple pages on

one sheet of paper. Select

Layout

from the

Presets

drop-down

list to access the following features.

•

Pages per Sheet

: This feature determines how many

pages printed on one page. For details, see "Printing

Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper" on the next

column.

•

Layout Direction

: You can select the printing direction

on a page as like the examples on UI.

Mac OS 10.4

Using Your Printer with a Macintosh

Graphics

The

Graphics

tab provides options for selecting

Resolution(Quality)

and

Color Mode

. Select

Graphics

form the

Presets

' drop-down list to access the graphic

features.

•

Resolution(Quality)

: You can select the printing

resolution. The higher the setting, the sharper the clarity

of printed characters and graphics. The higher setting

also may increase the time it takes to print a document.

Paper

Set

Paper Type

to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray

from which you want to print. This will let you get the best

quality printout. If you load a different type of print material,

select the corresponding paper type.

Mac OS 10.4

Printer Features

This tab provides options for selecting the paper type and

adjusting print quality. Select

Printer Features

from the

Presets

' drop-down list to access the following features:

•

Reverse Duplex Printing

: Allows you to select general

print order compare to duplex print order.

•

Fit to Page

: This setting allows you to scale your print

job to any selected paper size regardless of the digital

document size. This can be useful when you want to

check fine details on a small document.

Mac OS 10.4

Using Your Printer with a Macintosh

Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet

of Paper

You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper.

This feature provides a cost-effective way to print draft pages.

From your Macintosh application, select

from the

File

menu.

Select

Layout

Select the number of pages you want to print on one sheet

of paper on the

Pages per Sheet

drop-down list.

Select the page order from the

Layout Direction

option.

To print a border around each page on the sheet, select

the option you want from the

Border

drop-down list.

Click

, and the printer prints the selected number of

pages on one side of each page.

Mac OS 10.3

Duplex Printing

You can print on both sides of the paper. Before printing in the

duplex mode, decide on which edge you will be binding your

finished document. The binding options are:

Long-Edge Binding

: Which is the conventional layout

used in book binding.

Short-Edge Binding

: Which is the type often used with

calendars.

From your Macintosh application, select

from the

File

menu.

Select the

Layout

Select a binding orientation from

Two Sided Printing

option.

Click

and the printer prints on both sides of the

paper.

AUTION

If you have selected duplex printing and

then try to print multiple copies of a document, the

printer may not print the document in the way you

want. In case of "Collated copy" , if your document has

odd pages, the last page of the first copy and the first

page of the next copy will be printed on the front and

back of one sheet. In case of "Uncollated copy", the

same page will be printed on the front and back of one

sheet. Therefore, if you need multiple copies of a

document and you want those copies on both sides of

the paper, you must print them one at a time, as

separate print jobs

Mac OS 10.3

Using Your Printer with a Macintosh

Scanning

You can scan docoments using

Image Capture

. Macintosh OS

offers

Image Capture

Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on

and properly connected to each other.

Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF). OR

place a single document face down on the document glass.

Start

Applications

and click

Image Capture

OTE

: If

No Image Capture device connected

message

appears, disconnect the USB cable and reconnect it. If the

problem persists, please refer to the

Image Capture

’s help.

Set the scan options on this program.

Scan and save your scanned image.

OTE

• For more information about using

Image Capture

, please

refer to the

Image Capture

’s help.

• Use TWAIN-compliant softwares to apply more scan options.

• You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant softwares, such as

Adobe Photoshop.

• Scan process differ according to TWAIN-compliant

softwares. Please refer to the user’s guide of the software.

• When scanning does not operate in

Image Capture

, update

Mac OS to the latest version.

Image Capture

operates

properly in Mac OS 10.3.9 or higher and Mac OS 10.4.7 or

higher.

SOFTWARE SECTION

INDEX

advanced printing, use

booklet printing

canceling

scan

document, print

Macintosh

Windows

double-sided printing

Extras properties, set

favorites settings, use

Graphics properties, set

help, use

18, 24

install

printer driver

Macintosh

Windows

installing

Linux software

Layout properties, set

Windows

Linux

driver, install

printer properties

printing

scanning

Macintosh

driver

install

uninstall

printing

scanning

setting up the printer

MFP driver, install

Linux

n-up printing

Macintosh

Windows

orientation, print

Windows

overlay

create

delete

Paper properties, set

paper size, set

paper source, set

Windows

paper tray, set

copy

paper type, set

poster, print

PostScript driver

installing

document

fit to page

from Macintosh

from Windows

N-up

Macintosh

Windows

overlay

poster

PRN

scaling

watermark

print resolution

printer driver, install

Linux

printer properties

Linux

printer properties, set

Macintosh

Windows

14, 24

printer resolution, set

Windows

printer software

install

Macintosh

Windows

uninstall

Macintosh

Windows

printing

booklets

double-sided

from Linux

resolution

printing

scanning

Linux

SmarThru

TWAIN

WIA driver

scanning from Macintosh

setting

darkness

favorites

image mode

resolution

Windows

toner save

true-type option

software

install

Macintosh

Windows

reinstall

Windows

system requirements

Macintosh

uninstall

Macintosh

Windows

status monitor, use

toner save, set

TWAIN, scan

uninstall, software

Macintosh

Windows

uninstalling

MFP driver

Linux

watermark

create

delete

edit

WIA, scan

Samsung Scx 6555Nx Users Manual ManualsLib Makes It Easy To Find Manuals Online!

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation